Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
B11-0496 Project Manual Volume 1 approved
PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 OF 3 Strata Vail Vail, Colorado 100% Issue For Construction December 20, 2013 OZ Architecture 3003 Larimer Street Denver, Colorado OZ Project No. 17004 Received By Lynne Campbell at 10:56 am, Jan 13, 2014 B11-0701 Reviewed for Code Compliance Code: 2012 International Building Code (IBC) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DOCUMENT 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00002 PROJECT DIRECTORY SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 00220 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00221 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01230 ALTERNATES 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02240 DEWATERING SYSTEM 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02315 LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02580 ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02754 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02760 PAVEMENT MARKING 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02815 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02900 LANDSCAPING 02901 SOIL AMENDMENT 02922 TOPSOIL DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03542 HYDRAULIC- CEMENT- BASED UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04814 CONCRETE MASONRY 04816 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04851 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04860 STONE MASONRY STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05511 METAL STAIRS 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05530 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05532 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05715 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06150 WOOD DECKING 06160 SHEATHING 06185 STRUCTURAL GLUED- LAMINATED LUMBER 06201 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07142 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07180 CONCRETE SEALERS 07182 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07412 METAL SIDING 07413 METAL ROOF PANELS 07460 SIDING 07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07570 TRAFFIC BEARING MEMBRANES 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07812 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07920 JOINT SEALANTS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 2 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08263 SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08264 SWINGING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08334 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08452 STEAM ROOM DOORS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08830 MIRRORS 08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAINWALLS 08952 FIBERGLASS-SANDWICH-PANEL ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09622 RESILIENT SPORTS- FLOOR COVERINGS 09640 WOOD FLOORING 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09671 EPOXY FLOOR COATING 09680 CARPET 09681 CARPET TILE 09770 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09920 PAVEMENT MARKINGS (GARAGE) 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS OZ Product Information - Unit Finishes OZ Product Information – Public Space Finishes STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10310 FIREPLACE SPECIALTIES 10431 SIGNAGE 10440 GARAGE SIGNAGE 10506 WOOD LOCKERS 10508 PLASTIC LAMINATE LOCKERS 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11110 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12364 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12375 ENGINEERED QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13150 SWIMMING POOLS AND WHIRLPOOLS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14560 CHUTES STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO VOLUME 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15030 HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15240 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE SYSTEMS 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15500 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 15550 BOILERS 15600 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS 15650 REFRIGERATION 15655 REFRIGERANT AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 15750 HEAT TRANSFER 15770 SWIMMING POOL HEAT RECOVERY 15780 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION AND SHEET METAL 15975 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15980 MECHANICAL SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL 00001 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16035 REVIEWS AND ACCEPTANCES 16055 TEMPORARY LIGHTING POWER 16060 IDENTIFICATION 16065 TESTING, ACCEPTANCES AND CERTIFICATIONS 16102 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND COORDINATION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16120 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) 16122 FIRE SEALS 16125 ALUMINUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS 16132 POKE THROUGH AND FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16160 PANELBOARDS 16165 LOAD CENTERS 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16175 MODULAR METER CENTERS 16181 FUSES 600 VOLTS AND LESS 16400 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) 16403 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM 16440 SWITCHBOARDS 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 16470 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER 16490 TRANSFER SWITCHES 16500 LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES 16601 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16735 CONDUIT ROUGH-IN OF SPECIAL SYSTEMS 16858 ROOF, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SNOWMELT SYSTEMS 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL 16940 CONTACTORS DIVISION 19 – SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 19591 SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM END OF DOCUMENT 00001 12/20/2013 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING 00220 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO DOCUMENT 00220 - SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND REPORTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Document references information, not a part of the Contract Documents, relevant to the construction of this Project, and available for review and purchase. 1.2 DISCLAIMER AND RESPONSIBILITY A. No representation or warranty, express or implied, is made by the Architect, Engineer, Owner, or any other Party regarding the accuracy, completeness, adequacy, or content of the information referenced in this Document. B. The use and interpretation of information referenced in this Document is at the sole discretion of the User. 1.3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT A. The Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant has conducted subsurface investigations at the Project site and has prepared a report of the investigation. 1. Owner’s Geotechnical Consultant: CTL/ Thompson, 1971 West 12th Ave., Denver, CO 80204, 303-825-0777, attn. Charles Braun. 2. Geotechnical Consultant’s Report or Project Number: DN43, 108-125. 3. Date of Geotechnical Report: October 2, 2007. 4. Supplemental Letter November 5, 2007. B. A copy of the Geotechnical Report is included herein for convenience. C. Additional copies of the Geotechnical Report may be obtained, at cost of reproduction, from the Owner upon written request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DOCUMENT 00220 November 5, 2007 Lionshead Inn, LLC. c/o The Wells Partnership, Inc. 7951 E. Maplewood Ave, Suite 200 Greenwood Village, CO 80111 Attention: Axel Russell Subject: Lateral Earth Pressures for Design of Foundation Walls Fogata Lodge Vail, Colorado Project No. DN43,108-125 CTL│Thompson, Inc. performed a Geotechnical Investigation for the proposed Fogata Lodge project and presented results in a report dated October 2, 2007. We were requested to reconsider the construction sequence anticipated for the project to determine if some modification to the recommended lateral earth pressures used for design of foundation walls could be considered. We have discussed the sequence and design parameters with Colleen Arni, P.E. with Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. This letter confirms the discussions and our recommended design alternatives. The Fogata structure will include three levels of below grade construction which will primarily be used for parking. The excavation for the project will likely be retained using soldier piles and lagging tied back with soil nails. Foundation walls will be cast-in-place concrete poured using a one-sided forming system; the retention system will serve as the outside form. We anticipate that soldier piles will be installed prior to excavation, and the soil nail system installed as excavation proceeds. The retention system will be temporary; it will remain in place but foundation walls will be designed to resist lateral earth pressures. We provided a lateral earth pressure distribution for design of the retention system on Fig. 5 of our October 2 report. Once the excavation is completed, the foundation footings and walls will be built. We believe the walls will be subject to very low lateral loads initially because the retention system will still be in place. Over time (likely years) the retention system may corrode or relax, and lateral earth pressures will then be transferred to the foundation walls. As long as the below grade floor systems are capable of transferring load from one side of the building across to the opposite side, the foundation walls will be subject to the same potential loads as the retention system. The foundation walls can be designed using either the triangular distribution calculated using an equivalent fluid density of 50 pounds per cubic foot, or with a uniform pressure calculated as 25 times the height of retained earth. These pressures are illustrated as Case A and B on the attached sketch, respectively. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FOGATA LODGE VAIL, COLORADO Prepared For: LIONSHEAD INN, LLC C/O THE WELLS PARTNERSHIP, INC. 7951 East Maplewood Avenue, Suite 200 Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111 Attention: Mr. Axel Russell Project No. DN43,108-125 October 2, 2007 LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc TABLE OF CONTENTS SCOPE.................................................................................................................................1 SITE CONDITIONS..............................................................................................................1 PRIOR STUDIES.................................................................................................................2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.............................................................................................2 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION...........................................................................................5 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE...........................................................................................7 CONSTRUCTION DEWATERING.......................................................................................8 SITE PREPARATION..........................................................................................................8 Excavation.......................................................................................................................8 Fill and Backfill................................................................................................................9 BUILDING FOUNDATION.................................................................................................10 Footings.........................................................................................................................11 PERMANENT DEWATERING...........................................................................................13 SLAB-ON-GRADE FLOOR AND EXTERIOR FLATWORK.............................................14 LATERAL EARTH LOADS................................................................................................15 Basement Wall – Level Backfill....................................................................................16 Temporary Anchored or Soil Nail Walls – Level Backfill...........................................16 Cantilever Retaining Walls – Free to Rotate...............................................................17 Surcharge Loads...........................................................................................................17 PAVEMENTS.....................................................................................................................17 CONCRETE.......................................................................................................................18 SURFACE DRAINAGE......................................................................................................18 CONSTRUCTION MONITORING......................................................................................19 LIMITATIONS....................................................................................................................19 FIGURE 1 – EXISTING AND PROPOSED BUILDINGS FIGURE 2 – LOCATIONS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS FIGURE 3 – ESTIMATED CONTOURS OF GROUND WATER ELEVATION FIGURE 4 – LOCATIONS OF CROSS-SECTIONS FIGURE 5 – RECOMMENDED LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION FIGURE 6 – SURCHARGE LOADS FIGURE 7 – CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATION WALL DRAIN AND LATERAL DRAIN DETAILS APPENDIX A – LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS APPENDIX B – LABORATORY TEST RESULTS APPENDIX C – CROSS-SECTIONS SCOPE This report presents the results of our Geotechnical Investigation for the proposed Fogata Lodge project at the site of the Lionshead Inn and Vail Glo in Vail, Colorado (Fig. 1). The scope was described in the Consulting Agreement dated August 15, 2007. Environmental site assessment and other environmental due diligence were not part of this scope. This report was prepared from data developed during field exploration, laboratory testing, engineering analysis and our experience with similar projects. Our opinions and recommendations regarding design criteria and construction details for foundations, slab-on-grade floor and exterior flatwork, lateral earth loads, and pavements are provided. We should be notified of changes to the building design to evaluate the impact that the changes may have, if any, on our recommendations. SITE CONDITIONS The Fogata project site is located south of I-70 South Frontage Road and west of West Lionshead Circle in Vail, Colorado. The site is currently occupied by the Lionshead Inn and Vail Glo properties and is bordered by the I-70 South Frontage Road to the north, West Lionshead Circle to the east, West Lionshead Circle and Enzian Condominiums to the south, and Vail Spa Condominiums to the west. The North Day Lot, Landmark Condos, Concert Hill Condominiums, Montaneros Condominiums and the Marriott Hotel are neighboring properties east or south of West Lionshead Circle. The Fogata site is currently occupied by two multi-story buildings. The western building (Lionshead Inn, 705 West Lionshead Circle) is four stories above ground with one basement level that walks out to the east. The eastern building (Vail Glo, 701 West Lionshead Circle) is four stories above ground with no below grade construction except for a boiler room which extends about 3 feet below the main floor level. A drive-under carport is at the south end of the building. The west LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 1 wall of the carport retains up to about 6 feet of soil. A concrete patio is atop the carport. The approximate configuration of the existing buildings is shown on Figure 1. Cross-sections AA and BB (Appendix C) indicate the approximate extent of the subsurface levels of the existing construction. The portion of the site that is not occupied by buildings is primarily surface parking and access drives. The Vail Glo property is accessed from West Lionshead Circle near the frontage road. The Lionshead Inn is accessed from West Lionshead Circle at the southeast corner of the property. The Lionshead Inn access drive is shared with Enzian Condominiums. There is an east facing concrete retaining wall with a maximum height of approximately 5 feet between the Lionshead Inn and Vail Glo properties. The ground surface elevation along the north end of the site varies from 8172 to 8158 with the lowest elevation near the northeast corner. Along the south side of the property, elevations range from about 8160 to 8144 feet with the lowest elevation near the southeast corner. PRIOR STUDIES Subsurface conditions were evaluated for this site prior to our study. We were provided a Subsurface Exploration Program, Geotechnical Recommendations report prepared by Ground Engineering Consultants Inc. (Job No. 06-6005; report dated February 14, 2006). Data obtained during Ground’s field investigation was considered in preparation of this report. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The site is located in the western part of the Vail Valley, five to six hundred feet north of the present channel of Gore Creek. We believe the area was primarily used for ranching prior to the development of the Vail Ski Resort in the 1960's. The soils within the valley bottom are believed to be glacial and reworked glacial deposits. Heavy cobble and gravel with some boulders are fairly common in this area. The near surface soils were probably modified during the construction of the existing buildings and parking lot. The general slope is down from the north to the south. Total change in grade across the property is approximately 28 feet. Previous LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 2 grading and construction has resulted in a fairly gently sloping area. Steep slopes exist toward the South Frontage Road, north of the property line. Access drives to Lionshead Inn and Vail Glo properties are along West Lionshead Circle. There is no access from the north and west. Drilling locations were limited to some extent to the access drive and parking areas because of the existing construction. Our subsurface exploration was conducted from August 23 through September 10, 2007. Prior to drilling, we contacted the Utility Notification Center of Colorado and the local sewer and water districts to identify locations of buried utilities. Five exploratory borings, or test holes (TH-1 through TH-5), were drilled with a truck-mounted CME 55 drill utilizing a 6-inch down-hole air hammer capable of penetrating large cobbles and boulders to advance casing. The boring locations are shown on Figure 2. The drilling method allowed insertion of a 1.5-inch inner diameter (2-inch O.D.) Standard sampling spoon with a minimum of caving at selected sample depths. This sampler was advanced with blows from a 140-pound hammer falling thirty inches (Standard Penetration Test). Since most of the soils encountered were granular, relative density is an important issue and is usually judged using field penetration resistance tests (blow counts). We believe the field penetration resistance test results are reliable values considering the method of advancing the boring and casing. A 3-inch inner diameter (3.5-inch O.D.) sampling spoon was used on occasion to obtain a larger sample. Our representative was present during drilling to obtain samples and to observe and log the soils found. Samples from the exploratory borings were returned to our Denver laboratory for visual classification and selection of samples for laboratory testing. After sampling was completed, we cleaned the drill areas. Slotted PVC pipe was installed in the test holes to facilitate ground water monitoring. We determined approximate boring elevations relative to USGS. The subsoils encountered during drilling generally consisted of slightly silty to clayey sands and gravels with cobbles and occasional boulders. All of our borings penetrated 5 to 7 inches of asphalt pavement. A surficial layer of sandy silt with gravel was found from the ground surface to a depth of about 5 to 7 feet in TH- 5. About 12 feet of fill, similar in composition to the native granular soils, was encountered in boring TH-1. Summary logs of the exploratory borings are LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 3 presented in Appendix A. Because the holes were advanced through soils containing cobbles and boulders, the conditions reported on the boring logs included judgment based on observed drilling resistance and material cuttings. The sampling devices exclude all materials larger than their inner diameter (1.5 or 3 inches). The borings were advanced to depths of 55 to 70 feet below the existing ground surface. Overall, the amount of clay and silt sized particles (passing the No. 200 Sieve) appeared to decrease with depth. Below the ground water level, the soils appeared visually cleaner than above ground water. Free ground water was found between elevations 8129 and 8109 at the time of drilling. When water levels were checked a few weeks later, ground water was measured between elevations 8116 and 8110. This data imply that a perched ground water table may exist at the site. We believe areas of perched water are localized. Estimated ground water surface contours are shown on Figure 3. Ground water conditions may vary due to seasonal or yearly cycles. We recommend additional monitoring of ground water levels prior to the initiation of construction, specifically during spring runoff. Samples of the soils selected for gradation testing contained between 9 to 58 percent gravel, 32 to 64 percent sand, and 9 to 27 percent silt and clay-sized particles. Laboratory test results are presented in Appendix B. As stated previously, sampling equipment limited the maximum retrievable soil size to about 1.5 or 3 inches. The site soils contain considerable larger material. We have seen some relatively large boulders removed from excavations in the Vail area. Our firm has provided consultation services for several other projects in the Vail area. Our experience indicates loose or soft soil pockets and lenses are sporadic but do exist in the glacial formation. The loose and soft soils are occasionally encountered at the base of foundation excavations, which can necessitate reduction of some footing contact pressures, removal of the soft materials and replacement with flowable fill, and/or underpinning of some footings with micro-piles. It will be important to check that suitable bearing materials are present below the footings, particularly at columns. If soft soils are found near the base of the excavation, the pockets may need to be removed and replaced with LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 4 compacted granular fill or flowable fill. Our representative should observe the bottom of the foundation excavation to assess whether soft soils are present and discuss mitigation alternatives (if merited). PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION Fogata will be a mixed-use retail, commercial and housing development. We have reviewed preliminary drawings showing building sections and exterior elevations prepared by OZ Architecture dated June 19, 2007. We had conversations with Hyder Construction, Inc. and with Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. regarding preliminary plans for the retention system and anticipated foundation loads. Fogata will include three levels of below-grade parking. The below-grade portions of the structure will be cast-in-place concrete. Two buildings and a central plaza will cover the parking levels at elevation 8152. The two superstructures will rise six to seven floors above the plaza. Levels above grade will be steel framed, with various forms of exterior cladding including masonry, stone, stucco, metal siding and wood. Two access points will be provided. The north access drive is planned at approximately the same elevation as the South Frontage Road. The drive will access a fire staging area along the north side of the building and a loading dock at the northwest corner of the structure. Below grade parking levels will be accessed from the existing access drive at the southeast corner of the property. All three below-grade levels are planned as parking areas and mechanical/storage rooms. The lowest floor level will be at elevation 8113 and will ramp up to elevation 8116; elevator pits will bottom about 4 to 5 feet below floor level. The first floor levels of the buildings will include a loading/unloading area, retail/commercial areas, mechanical/storage rooms, fitness and locker rooms, a pool, lounge areas, and a front desk lobby area. The central plaza will have a fire pit with seating, landscaped areas, and a hot tub. The central plaza and first floor level of the buildings are planned at 8152 with exception to the retail/commercial area at the southeast corner of the east building where the floor will be at elevation 8146 LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 5 and the loading/unloading area at the northwest corner of the west building where the floor level will be at elevation 8148.5. The structure will occupy nearly the entire site. The garage construction will require deep excavation. It is anticipated the excavation will bottom at approximate elevation 8110, which will require cuts ranging from about 34 feet (near the southeast property corner) to about 62 feet (near the northwest property corner). This will result in excavation below the existing and potential future ground water levels. Retained excavations, construction dewatering and permanent dewatering will be required. We understand Jehn Water Consultants, Inc. is designing the construction dewatering system. The potential for construction and permanent dewatering adversely influencing structures adjacent to the site and wells which may be near the site should be evaluated prior to dewatering. We recommend a monitoring program to check for movement of the adjacent structures and pavements be implemented prior to dewatering, and continued throughout the period when dewatering is in process. The selection of the excavation retention system has not been completed at this time. Monroe & Newell Engineers Inc., told us the system will be temporary, that is, it will remain in place but will not be relied upon for permanent restraint. Hyder Construction, Inc. indicated the excavation will likely be accomplished using soldier beams (steel “H” piles) and wood lagging tied back with soil nails. The use of tie backs will likely require easements below the neighboring properties and surrounding street right-of-ways. The adjacent structures and availability of easements for tie-backs could affect bracing design. Where tie-backs cannot be installed, a stiffer bracing system may be required. All bracing systems undergo some movement. The degree of movement depends on the type of system and tie- backs utilized. These potential movements should be estimated and considered in design. The excavation and bracing plan should incorporate a monitoring program to document existing neighboring structures, roadways, and sidewalk conditions and elevations before, during and after construction. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 6 The structure will be supported by a footing foundation. Monroe & Newell Engineers, Inc. provided some preliminary values for typical interior columns and wall loads. We understand the exterior columns will be supported by pilasters that are built into the concrete wall at the first level and will transfer the load through shear friction before it gets to the lowest level. Typical interior columns loads include dead load of 860 kips and live load of 370 kips. Typical walls will have dead load of 18.3 kips per foot and live load of 5.6 kips per foot. The below grade walls of the structure will be cast-in-place concrete. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE The construction sequence can influence our recommendations. We understand the sequence will include the following: 1. Initially, the existing buildings will be demolished. 2. Prior to proceeding with shoring and excavation, it may be necessary to relocate existing utilities. 3. Monitoring systems should be installed on the surrounding structures and surveyed throughout the construction dewatering and excavation phases to determine if there is an impact to the existing improvements. 4. When demolition has proceeded sufficiently to allow access, construction dewatering wells will be installed and dewatering will start. 5. The excavation retention contractor will begin installation of soldier piles, possibly while the dewatering system is being completed. 6. Excavation of the site is likely to occur starting at the north wall because of the drop in elevation across the site. Soil nailing and lagging will proceed with excavation. Construction dewatering must be in place and operational before the excavation reaches the ground water surface. 7. The permanent dewatering system and footing foundation will be constructed and foundation walls placed with the construction dewatering system active. 8. Construction dewatering will continue to maintain a lowered ground water condition until the permanent dewatering system is fully active. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 7 CONSTRUCTION DEWATERING Ground water will influence construction. Ground water elevations at the time of this investigation were encountered between about 8129 and 8110. Stabilized levels were measured at 8116 to 8110; water may be found above the stabilized levels. We anticipate the bottom of the excavation will be at or near elevation 8110. Previous experience with the alluvial sand deposit in this area indicates medium to high permeability. We recommend a minimum water level elevation of 8103 for construction. The risk of settlement or subsidence for adjacent structures and infrastructure is considered to be low due to dewatering. The potential for settlement depends upon the density of the soils, the magnitude and method of dewatering, and the foundation systems supporting existing structures. We recommend additional settlement analysis after the dewatering design concept is established. SITE PREPARATION Excavation As currently proposed the site development will include excavation ranging from about 34 feet to 62 feet below the existing ground level. Cross-sections of the planned excavation and adjacent properties are provided in Appendix C. The locations of the cross-sections are identified on Figure 4. The locations/elevations of existing utilities are not known (to us). We believe the majority of the excavation will encounter granular soils consisting of clayey to silty sand and gravel with cobbles and occasional boulders. The percentage of fines will probably decrease with depth. Pockets of soft silty clay, clayey silt, and loose silty sand may be found. Our experience in the Vail area indicates the soils can be excavated with heavy-duty excavation equipment. Large dozers with a single-tooth ripper and large track hoes should be able to remove the LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 8 cobbles and boulders. If there are narrow excavations, removal of some of the boulders may be difficult. Considering the planned excavation, this does not appear to be a significant issue; it could be during installation of utilities. Fill and Backfill The on-site soils, exclusive of any organic debris and rocks larger than 3 inches and clay/silt removed from “soft pockets”, are suitable for use as fill or foundation wall backfill (if any). Import soils used for fill and backfill should classify as silty to clayey sand or silty to clayey gravel with a maximum particle size of 3 inches. Fill should be submitted to our office for approval prior to importing. Pipes for sewers, storm sewers, roof drainage and other utilities should be bedded in graded granular fill. A fine sandy to fine gravel fill may be desirable because of the occurrence of cobble and boulder in any trench in the natural material. Fill and backfill should be placed in loose lifts of approximately 8-inch thickness or less, moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content and compacted. Thickness of lifts will likely need to be 4 to 6 inches if there are small confined areas which limit the size and weight of compaction equipment. The fill and backfill which will support traffic or flatwork should be compacted to at least 100 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). Fills placed in landscaped areas that will not support improvements can be compacted to at least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). Moisture content and density of the fill should be checked during placement by a representative of our firm. Observation of the compaction procedure is necessary. Testing without observation can lead to undesirable performance. Backfill will settle; any improvements placed over backfill should be designed for movement. We recommend that designs assume 1 percent settlement of the backfill due to weight of the fill. Timing of settlement is very difficult to anticipate because of the large number of variables. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 9 We understand foundation walls will be formed directly against the retained excavation face where practical. We anticipate foundation walls may be constructed away from the face of the excavation in limited areas such as the excavation ramp. Deep narrow zones of backfill between the excavation face and foundation walls can become very difficult for placement and proper compaction. Where backfill is required in difficult and confined areas, settlement of 2 to 3 percent of the thickness of the backfill may occur because of the difficulty in achieving compaction. We have observed settlements approaching 10 percent of the thickness of the backfill in some narrow zones. Placement of a cementitious “flowable-fill” material should be considered in these areas to reduce potential settlement. We recommend flowable-fill meet the requirements for Controlled Low-Strength Materials (CLSM) described in ACI 229R-99. This reference indicates compressive strengths in the range of 160 to 500 pounds per square inch (psi) can be achieved with a Class V to VII CLSM and that permeability for CLSM is typically in the range of 10-4 to 10-5 centimeters per second. This permeability is similar to a compacted granular (sand) fill. If it is desired for the flowable fill to be relatively free-draining, we can work with the supplier to attempt to develop a suitable mix. Flowable fill should be placed in lifts and allowed to set so that excessive hydrostatic forces do not develop on the foundation walls. Our experience suggests placement in at least three lifts will be necessary; the structural engineer should evaluate this issue. BUILDING FOUNDATION Three types of foundations could be constructed at this site. The buildings can be constructed on conventional spread footing foundations supported by the natural sands and gravels. A reinforced mat supported by the natural soils is also an appropriate foundation alternative. The third possibility is driven piling. The boulder and cobble content of the natural soil is relatively high and may cause installation problems for driven piling. We understand that a footing system has been selected for the building. We made calculations using the existing and proposed grades to estimate the existing stress conditions at various locations on the proposed excavation bottom. We examined several potential conditions including the overburden LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 10 pressure at the bottom of the proposed excavation during the “current” ground water condition with no dewatering, and the same elevation with full construction dewatering. Based on our calculations, we believe the effective stress under the current ground water conditions at the proposed bottom of excavation ranges from about 4,000 to 5,500 psf under most of the site. The stress may approach 7,300 psf under the northeast site corner. For the fully dewatered construction condition, these stresses are slightly higher. Excavation to the required depth will reduce the effective stress from the current condition of approximately 4,000 to 5,500 psf to zero at the bottom of the excavation. Construction of the building will then reload the soils. Using a footing pressure of 7,000 psf, the new structure will impose a maximum increase in effective stress at footing level of about 3,000 psf. Because of this loading and unloading sequence, we anticipate relatively nominal settlements of the structure due to the imposed loads. It is possible for soils to rebound, or “heave” in the base of a deep excavation. Based upon the stress history of soils at this site and the granular nature of the soils, we anticipate the heave will not be significant. We do not believe rebound of the unloaded soil will affect foundation design or performance. Design and construction criteria for a footing foundation system are provided below. These criteria were developed from analysis of field and laboratory data and our experience. Footings 1. We anticipate construction of a footing foundation bottomed at about elevation 8110. Footings should be constructed on undisturbed native granular soils or well-compacted fill placed to the criteria provided in item 4 below. 2. Footings should be designed for a maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of 7,000 psf. This pressure can be increased 30 percent for short-duration liveload combinations such as from wind and earthquake. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 11 3. Our experience in this part of Vail suggests lenses or pockets of comparatively soft soils may be encountered at or near the base of the excavation. Our representative should observe the excavation bottom to look for evidence of such soils. If soft soils are found, they should be removed and replaced by compacted fill or flowable fill. Other measures may be necessary, depending on the depth and extent of the soft soils. 4. The excavation process will likely encounter large boulders and cobbles and could be relatively rough at the end of the primary excavation. If irregular depressions develop as a result of boulder removal, they can be filled with compacted Class 6 aggregate base course or the on-site granular soils, provided any 3-inch plus materials are removed. Fill placed below footings should be compacted to at least 100 percent of the maximum dry density determined using ASTM D 698. The bottom of the excavation should be rolled to compact surface loosening prior to forming footings. Rubber tire rollers or smooth drum steel wheel rollers will be suitable. Vibrating rollers should specifically "not be allowed". The vibrations may tend to draw water up into the excavation. 5. Footings will be constructed after ground water is drawn down by construction dewatering. Construction dewatering must continue to maintain a lowered ground water surface until the permanent dewatering system is active. 6. For lateral load resistance, a friction coefficient of 0.5 can be used between cast-in-place footings and the natural sand or gravel soils. The passive earth pressure provided by well-compacted foundation wall and footing backfill consisting of on-site or similar soils can be calculated using an equivalent fluid pressure or 350 pcf. 7. Foundation walls for continuous footings should be reinforced top and bottom to span an unsupported distance of at least 10 feet and lateral loads. 8. To avoid local "punching" type failure, we recommend continuous footings be designed with a minimum width of 24 inches and isolated column footings have dimensions of at least 30 inches by 30 inches. Larger sizes are anticipated. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 12 9. Based on soil conditions at this site, we consider the following seismic criteria appropriate. UBC Seismic Zone = 1 Seismic Zone Factor (z) = 0.075 Soil Profile Type = Sc IBC 2000 Site Class C Site Coefficient of 1.2 for Fa and volume 1.7 for Site Coefficient Fv 10. Footings should be located below frost depth. We believe the local practice in Vail is to place footings at least 48 inches below the surface in unheated areas. The actual depth of frost penetration is much greater than 48 inches, however, this depth has a long record of good performance. 11. The bottom of the excavation should be checked by representatives of CTL | Thompson to determine that conditions are as anticipated. We should also observe the surface compaction of the bottom of the excavation. PERMANENT DEWATERING At the time of our investigation, stabilized ground water levels were measured about 0 to 4 feet above the lowest parking floor level. Water was found as much as 16 feet above the floor. The excavation and building will require temporary dewatering during construction and permanent dewatering after construction. The permanent dewatering system should consist of wall drains, a perimeter collector trench, a minimum 12-inch thick underslab gravel drainage layer, (possibly) lateral collectors, along with sumps, pumps, and alarm systems (typical details are shown on Fig. 7). Hydrostatic relief valves should be installed in the floor slab as a back-up in case of electrical failure. The wall drain has a recommended top elevation of 8135. This places the top of the drain about 6 feet above the highest water level encountered during drilling and 19 feet above the highest measured stabilized water level. Preliminary spacing for interior laterals (if used) on the order of 30 to 50 feet is anticipated. (On other recent projects in Vail, a 12-inch layer of gravel has been used without laterals). LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 13 Multiple sumps or a single sump location below the lowest level can be used. Since the building footprint is relatively large, the drain system can be partitioned to cover particular areas (levels) with a pipe outlet to the sump. This configuration will help limit the length of drain and resulting depth required to provide the minimum slope. The location and spacing of laterals (if any) will be influenced by column or cap locations. Conditions encountered during construction including dewatering rates should be monitored to evaluate the size of the permanent dewatering system. The size of sumps and pumps should consider the variability in flow conditions. Comparatively lower flows may occur during the winter months when ground water levels usually drop and there may be less recharge. Backup power systems and alarms should be included. If you would like us to design the permanent system, we should be contacted when construction plans are more defined and construction dewatering rates are known to provide specific drain system recommendations including drain system layout, spacing of laterals, flow estimates and other details which may be required. Where elevator pits extend below slab level, we believe the best alternative will be to construct the elevator pits as water-tight areas. The effects of buoyancy and hydrostatic pressures need to be considered in design. The recommended drain system should prevent hydrostatic pressures from developing on lower parking level walls. However, high moisture conditions may result in transmission through below-grade walls. Some form of moisture retarder or waterproof barrier should be considered. The level of protection desired will depend on the level of performance desired. Building code considerations may control the required level of protection. SLAB-ON-GRADE FLOOR AND EXTERIOR FLATWORK The lowest level and exterior flatwork outside the building walls will be constructed as slabs-on-grade. Native soils or similar properly compacted fill should provide adequate support for slab-on-grade construction. For parking areas, LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 14 some slab movement can typically be tolerated. If vibrating machinery will be included in mechanical rooms, they should be provided with their own foundation, isolated from the slabs. We recommend the slabs be isolated from walls, columns, and other foundation-supported building elements. Plumbing lines which penetrate the floor slabs should be isolated from the slabs. Frequent control joints should be provided in the slabs to reduce problems associated with shrinkage. We are available to work with the design team to develop details, if requested. The 2006 International Building Code (IBC) or 2006 International Residential Code (IRC) may require a vapor retarder be placed between base course or subgrade soils and the concrete slab-on-grade floors. The merits of installation of a vapor retarder below floor slabs depend on the sensitivity of floor coverings and building use to moisture. A properly installed vapor retarder (10 mil minimum) is more beneficial below concrete slab-on-grade floors where floor coverings, painted floor surfaces or products stored on the floor will be sensitive to moisture. The vapor retarder is most effective when concrete is placed directly on top of it. A sand or gravel leveling course should not be placed between the vapor retarder and the floor slab. The placement of concrete on the vapor retarder may increase the risk of shrinkage cracking and curling. Use of concrete with reduced shrinkage characteristics including minimized water content, maximized coarse aggregate content, and reasonably low slump will reduce the risk of shrinkage cracking and curling. Considerations and recommendations for the installation of vapor retarders below concrete slabs are outlined in Section 3.2.3 of the 2003 or 2006 report of American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction (ACI 302.R-96 or 302.1R-04)”. LATERAL EARTH LOADS We understand foundation walls will be cast-in-place concrete and will generally be formed to the retained excavation face. The retention system will not be relied upon for permanent restraint. We anticipate in limited areas, foundation walls may be constructed away from the excavation face. Retaining walls adjacent LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 15 to the parking level entry/exit ramp and landscaped areas may be subject to other lateral load conditions. Because movement of the soil controls the lateral load on the wall, different values of lateral earth pressure are recommended for design. Design lateral earth pressure distributions for various conditions are presented on Figure 5. A discussion of lateral earth pressure conditions for design is in the following sections. Basement Wall - Level Backfill This condition assumes use of on-site granular soil backfill with slight slope away from the building. The wall is assumed to be restrained from rotation. The design value does not include allowance for traffic, surcharge loads or hydrostatic load. For a fully dewatered system, an equivalent fluid density of 50 pounds per cubic foot is recommended to calculate lateral earth pressure on the wall. Temporary Anchored or Soil Nail Walls - Level Backfill These walls can be designed using conventional methods such as the procedures presented in “Design Manual for Permanent Ground Anchor Walls FHWA-RD-97-130” or similar documents and various computer programs. The on- site soils can be modeled with φ =32o, C=0 psf and moist unit weight equal to 130 pcf. Alternatively the pressure on the anchored wall in pounds per square foot can be calculated as 25H where H is the height of wall in feet. Drainage of the wall is assumed throughout construction. The pressure distribution diagram for level backfill and granular soils is shown as “Temporary Anchored Wall - Level Backfill” on Figure 5. The anchored wall distribution provided on Figure 5 should be used with judgment based on the experience of the excavation retention designer. The designer should consider the potential for pressures due to seepage and potential short-term power outages affecting the dewatering system. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 16 Cantilever Retaining Walls - Free to Rotate Retaining walls adjacent to the parking level entry ramp and landscaped areas may be able to experience sufficient rotation (between 0.5 and 1 percent of wall height) to allow the active earth pressure condition to develop. Rotation of approximately one percent of the height of the wall should be allowed for the life of the structure. Joints must be provided where this type of wall intersects walls that are restrained from rotating. Retaining walls that are free to rotate can be designed to resist active earth pressure calculated with a 35 pcf equivalent fluid pressure. This case is referred to as “Cantilever Retaining Wall – Level Backfill” on Figure 5. Surcharge Loads The conditions discussed above do not include surcharge loads from traffic, crane loads, or adjacent structures. Figure 6 presents a method for calculation of surcharge pressure on walls from either point or line loads. Traffic loads are modeled as a uniform surcharge pressure in some analyses. PAVEMENTS Surface paved areas will be provided for areas such as parking garage access ramps, fire lanes, and delivery loading/unloading areas. We anticipate the parking garage access ramp will be used primarily by automobiles and the loading dock and fire access lane from the frontage road will be subject to heavy truck traffic. Pavement subgrade should consist of well-compacted granular fill. Based on assumed traffic loadings, we recommend a 6-inch or thicker portland cement concrete pavement section. The design of a pavement system is as much a function of paving materials as supporting characteristics of the subgrade. The quality of each construction material is reflected by the strength coefficient used in the calculations. If the pavement system is constructed of inferior materials, then the life and serviceability of the pavement will be substantially reduced. We recommend the materials and placement methods conform to the requirements listed in the LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 17 Colorado Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction." All materials planned for construction should be submitted and tested to confirm their compliance with these specifications. CONCRETE Concrete in contact with soil can be subject to sulfate attack. We measured water-soluble sulfate concentrations in three samples from this site. Concentrations were measured between 0.001 and 0.006 percent. Sulfate concentrations less than 0.1 percent indicate Class 0 exposure to sulfate attack for concrete in contact with the subsoils, according to the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Guide To Durable Concrete (ACI 201.2R-01). For this level of sulfate concentration, ACI indicates any type of cement can be used for concrete in contact with the subsoils. In our experience, superficial damage may occur to the exposed surfaces of highly permeable concrete, even though sulfate levels are relatively low. To control this risk and to resist freeze-thaw deterioration, the water- to-cementitious material ratio should not exceed 0.50 for concrete in contact with soils that are likely to stay moist due to surface drainage or high water tables. Concrete should have a total air content of 6% + 1.5%. We recommend all walls in contact with the subsoils be damp-proofed. SURFACE DRAINAGE Performance of foundations, concrete flatwork and pavement is influenced by the moisture conditions existing within the foundation or subgrade soils. Overall surface drainage should be designed to provide rapid runoff of surface water away from the proposed building and off of pavements. Roof drain outlets should discharge beyond backfill zones or into appropriate sewer outlets. Landscaped areas should be planned to reduce the amount of moisture applied to the ground surface adjacent to the building. Backfill around foundation walls should be moistened and compacted as outlined in the report. LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc 18 LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc APPENDIX A LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc APPENDIX B LABORATORY TEST RESULTS LIONSHEAD INN, LLC FOGATA LODGE CTL | T PROJECT NO. DN43,108-125 S:\PROJECTS\DN43108.000\125\2. Reports\R1\DN43108-125-R1.doc APPENDIX C CROSS-SECTIONS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUMMARY 01100 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Strata Vail. 1. Project Location: Vail, CO. B. Owner: Lionshead Inn LLC. 1. Owner's Representative: Rodrigo Cortina. C. Architect: OZ Architecture. D. Contractor: To Be Selected. 1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUMMARY 01100 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Shared Access: Maintain Enzian and other shared access agreements. Coordinate temporary shutdown periods with Enzian and other adjacent property owners. Provide Owner with written notice no less than three days prior to any activity that may affect adjacent property owners’ site or building use or access. D. Adjacent Property and Owners: 1. Provide “Good Neighbor” plan for Owner’s approval no less than 30 days prior to anticipated commencement of the work. Include the following: a. Abbreviated schedule that emphasizes activities, dates, and durations that may affect adjacent property/ owners. b. Contractor measures that will eliminate or minimize work activity effects on adjacent property/ owners. Include pre- construction status of adjacent sites and structures, monitoring methods, and plans for repair or replacement of adjacent sites or structures damaged by Contractor activities. c. List of adjacent property owners to be contacted by Contractor prior to activities that may affect adjacent property owners’ site or building use or access. 1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUMMARY 01100 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Comply with requirements of Town of Vail and other authorities having jurisdiction. 1. After- Hours Work: When acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction, provide required written notice, but no less than three days, to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner in writing not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUMMARY 01100 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 Denver, CO SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: Currently there are no Alternates. END OF SECTION 01230 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests . 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner on Contractor’s standard form acceptable to Owner . 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 . Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. d. List of Subcontractors. e. List of Products. f. List of Principal Suppliers and Fabricators. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets . 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or other standard form acceptable to and approved by Owner as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Conservation 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Project meetings. 5. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return two copies . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Parking availability. p. Office, work, and storage areas. q. Equipment deliveries and priorities. r. First aid. s. Security. t. Progress cleaning. u. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals as appropriate. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings when required. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A . 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Anticipate no less than two and no more than ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. Architect’s local time will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. H. If requested information is available from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation, Architect may invoice Owner as a change in services for costs involved in Architect’s review, analysis, responding and processing of such RFI. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for such costs. I. Contractor may anticipate receiving 375 clarifications, interpretations, orders for Minor Changes in the Work or responses to valid requests for interpretations or clarifications of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. 5. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 30 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Use of premises restrictions. b. Seasonal variations. c. Environmental control. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion[.] E. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart- type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work . Base schedule on whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values." 2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions, if any, authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 9. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. See other Part 1 Articles for additional requirements for release of electronic file copies. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include a sequential alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Encircle or similarly specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Do not submit additional copies intended for maintenance manuals with initial submittals. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will forward to the Contractor, without review, submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 . 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “Revise As Noted” or "No Exceptions Taken." J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “Revise As Noted” or "No Exceptions Taken." 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. A $500 fee per discipline to cover the Architect’s administrative costs and labor associated with assembling the waiver and the documents to transfer the files, is required. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. The Architect will provide to the Contractor electronic files required upon completion of the Architect’s electronic waiver form at the end of this Section. Sub-contractors may obtain files from the Contractor. 3. The Architect will only transfer files containing plans, including roof plans, exterior elevations and building sections. Files may not reflect field changes. No other drawing files will be transferred to parties outside of OZ ARCHITECTURE. A signed copy of the abovementioned waiver must be submitted by the Contractor prior to any files transfer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless use of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted. Standard information submitted without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing and will be returned without review. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 3. Number of Copies: a. Initial Submittals: Submit one high quality, high- contrast reproducible and one blueline or blackline copy of each submittal. Architect will return the reproducible. b. Final Submittals: Submit three (five where required for maintenance manuals) blueline or blackline copies of each submittal. Architect will return two (four) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. e. Required standards compliance. f. Availability and delivery time. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work or otherwise designated as Owner's property are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents, and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review submittals, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp submittals with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. “No Exceptions Taken”: When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on this compliance. 2. “Revise as Noted”: When the Architect marks this action, the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on this compliance. 3. “Rejected”: When the Architect marks this action, do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. 4. “Revise & Resubmit”: When the Architect marks a submittal “Revise and Resubmit”, do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a new action mark. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a) Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. “Returned Without Review”: Submittals not in compliance with requirements of this Section. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE MATRIX A. The following matrix identifies submittals required for each technical Specification Section for this Project. Specific requirements for submittals and procedures are found in other Division 1 Sections and in individual Divisions 2 through 16 Sections. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Use of Architect’s Drawings on Electronic Media (Contractor Form) OZ ARCHITECTURE 1805 29th Street, Suite 2054 Boulder, Colorado 80301 Phone 303.449.8900 fax 303.449.3886 To: Date: Firm: Project: From: Project No.: File No.: At your request, OZ Architecture of Boulder, Inc. (“OZ ARCHITECTURE”) will provide CAD files on CDRom for your convenience in the preparation of shop drawings and for the use of your subcontractors, suppliers and material men, solely for this particular purpose and subject to the following terms and condition: A. OZ ARCHITECTURE CAD files are compatible with AutoCAD r.2000, operating on a Pentium-based personal com- puter, using Windows NT. OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation as to the compatibility or these files beyond the specified release of the referenced software nor does OZ ARCHITECTURE make any representation as to the compatibility of the files on any other software or hardware. B. Information presented on CAD disks is considered part of OZ ARCHITECTURE’s instruments of professional service, require professional interpretation and judgment, and shall not be used by you for any purpose other than the conven- ience of preparation of shop drawings for this particular project. It is agreed that this information shall not be used for any other projects, for additions to this project or completion of this project by another design professional. Any other use or reuse by you or by others who obtained the CAD files directly or indirectly through you, will be at your sole risk and without any liability or legal exposure whatsoever to OZ ARCHITECTURE. Furthermore, you agree, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to defend, indemnify and hold harmless OZ ARCHITECTURE from all claims, damages, loss- es and expenses, including attorneys fees arising out of or resulting from the use of the CAD files. You further agree to make no claim and hereby waive, for yourself and your subcontractors, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against OZ ARCHITECTURE, its officers, directors, employees, agents or sub- consultants which may arise out of, or in connection with, your use of the CAD files. C. OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of CAD files. Addenda infor- mation or revisions made after the date indicated on the CAD files have not been incorporated and OZ ARCHITECTURE assumes no responsibility by virtue of this Agreement to advise you of any subsequent amend- ments, revisions or addenda. These CAD files are not “Contract Documents.” Significant differences may exist be- tween these CAD files and similar Contract Documents due to addenda, change orders or other revisions. OZ ARCHITECTURE makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of CAD files. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed Contract Documents prepared by OZ ARCHITECTURE and/or its sub- consultants, and CAD files, the signed and sealed Contract Documents shall govern. You are responsible to deter- mine if any conflicts exist. By your use of these CAD files, you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the Contract Documents, including without limitation the need to check, confirm and coordinate your work with that of oth- er contractors, if any, and to fully and properly supervise your subcontractors. D. Due to the potential that the information present in the CAD files can be modified unintentially or otherwise, OZ ARCHITECTURE reserves the right to remove all indicia of its ownership, authorship and/or involvement from each electronic display. However, by doing so, OZ ARCHITECTURE does not waive, modify, or limit its ownership, author- ship or rights for purposes of the copyright or intellectual property laws, rules, regulations or procedures. E. OZ ARCHITECTURE will furnish the digital format of the CAD files requested. Refer to attachment for a list of all files transmitted. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. An administrative fee of $500.00, per discipline, shall be remitted to OZ ARCHITECTURE prior to delivery of the CAD files. G. No warranty, express or implied, including the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose is made respecting this Agree or the CAD files. H. Any purchase order number provided by Contractor is for Contractor’s accounting purposes only. Purchase order terms and conditions are void and are not a part of this Agreement. I. This is not a sale of OZ ARCHITECTURE’s copyrights. Nothing herein shall be interpreted or deemed to be a transfer of any of OZ ARCHITECTURE’s copyrights, except for a limited use license as specifically set forth herein. Except for the specific uses approved herein, no other license, right or other uses are granted or implied by this Agreement. You may not assign, delegate, sublicense, pledge, or otherwise transfer any license or right granted herein to another par- ty, except as specifically provided herein, without the prior written approval of OZ ARCHITECTURE. J. This is solely an agreement between your company and OZ ARCHITECTURE. There are not third party beneficiaries to this Agreement. However, Contractor agrees to impose the same limitations and conditions contained herein upon the use of the CAD files upon any of its subcontractors, suppliers or material men to which access is given to the CAD files by Contractor. K. The laws of Colorado shall govern this Agreement. L. OZ ARCHITECTURE reserves the right to request a distribution log from the Contractor as to when the CAD files were issued and to whom they were issued. AUTHORIZED ACCEPTANCE OZ ARCHITECTURE OF BOULDER, INC. By Title Date Official name of Contractor By Title Date STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO ATTACHED DOCUMENT LIST File Name Size Date Description END OF SECTION 01330 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. Experienced: Unless otherwise indicated, when used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. C. In the event of inconsistency between portions of Contract Documents or within Contract Documents; provide better quality and greater quantity of Work. Bring all inconsistencies to Architect's attention, prior to installation, for Architect's interpretation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 7. See “Special Mockup Schedule” at the end of Part 3 of this Section for special mockups required in addition to mockup requirements in other individual Specification sections. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Include all tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, regardless of whether testing agency is Owner- or STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Contractor- engaged. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work . 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include all tests and inspections regardless of whether testing agency is Owner- or Contractor- engaged. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. 3.3 SPECIAL MOCKUP SCHEDULE A. Exterior Envelope Mockup: 1. Construct mockup incorporating the following visible and concealed components and materials: a. Stone veneers, including flashings and copings and other trim pieces. b. Fiber cement siding and flashings, trim, and reveals. c. Raised panel siding and flashings, trim, and reveals. d. Metal siding and flashings, trim, and reveals. e. Stucco and flashings, trim, and reveals. f. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation g. Material transitions details. h. Flashing transitions details. i. A typical aluminum- clad wood window, including flashings and trim. j. A typical aluminum- clad wood sliding door, including flashings and trim. k. Concrete tile roofing, including typical eave condition and guttering. l. Standing seam metal roofing, including typical eave condition. 2. Construct mockup “full depth”, excluding interior finish substrate. Include all wall, roof, and soffit weather- resistive assembly components. Include framing, sheathings, underlayments, flashings, air barriers, vapor retarders, extruded – polystyrene board insulation, sealants, and other full- envelope components. Include typical hardware, fasteners, and other accessories. 3. Exclude insulations, interior gypsum board vapor retarders and other components that conceal framing cavities from interior. 4. Mockup Size: As required for incorporation of indicated building components, but no less than 24 feet wide by 12 feet high. 5. Construct mockup on project site. Locate so that mockup may remain undisturbed until Substantial Completion or removal is approved by Architect, whichever occurs first. B. Interior Unit Mockup: 1. Construct 2 or 3 bedroom unit mockup incorporating all visible and concealed building systems and all finishes for Unit No. To Be Determined. END OF SECTION 01400 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl1 AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800 www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372 www.aosaseed.com APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723 www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155 www.internationalbadminton.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972) 238-5591 www.intertek.com ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613 www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext. 453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700 www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) (212) 297-2109 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) (847) 299-5200 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl2 BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472- 4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 15 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931- 4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423- 6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699- 0543 SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl3 CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 16 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHR P National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl4 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272- 0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 17 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512- 1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289- 7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 18 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl5 CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-5210 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041 CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 www.calregs.com CPU C California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703- 2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458- 6650 Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 5. Division 2 Section "Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for disposal of ground water at Project site. 6. Division 2 Section "Flexible Pavement" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the following: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. 6. City ordinances and regulations. B. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section "Flexible Pavement." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry ." 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 2. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND STAGING AREAS A. Do not endanger public, workers, or adjoining property by illegal, improper, or otherwise unacceptable storage and placement of equipment and materials for the duration of Project. B. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction regarding: temporary use of streets or public property for storage or handling of materials; use and storage of equipment required for construction or demolition; and protection provided to the public. C. Do not store or place construction materials and equipment: where they obstruct access to fire hydrants, standpipes, fire or police alarm boxes, catch basins or manholes; within 20 FT of a street intersection; where they interfere with existing storm water conveyances; or where they interfere with normal operations of traffic controls. D. Prior to start of Work, meet with Architect, subcontractors, suppliers, vendors, and other concerned parties to develop and prepare a Contractor’s Project Control Plan defining staging, storage, field office and traffic areas. 1. Obtain Owner's approval of plan. 2. Unless approved in writing by Owner, storage and staging outside of indicated and approved areas is prohibited. 3. Arrange and locate temporary storage and staging areas and structures to avoid interference with ongoing construction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. C. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent or fluorescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. E. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. H. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section " Erosion and Sedimentation Control." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin , furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations . G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide fire extinguishers, temporary standpipes and hoses, and other devices for fire protection as required by insurance requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction, and location of waste containers at Project site. 2. Division 1 Section "Site Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 3. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 4. Division 4 Masonry and Stone Sections for disposal requirements for masonry and stone waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous demolition waste will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner under a separate contract prior to demolition activities. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 4. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of this Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect does not make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, pro-duce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, con- sult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before pro- ceeding. Qualities may include attributes such as visual appearance, strength, dura-bility, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possi- ble. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after commencement of the Work . Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If one or more of the conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by authorities having jurisdiction, and the requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and the requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and the requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents, and the requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SUBSTITUTION REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: REASON FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a detailed description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature Firm Address Date Telephone Attachments: For Use by the design consultant [ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as noted [ ] Not Accepted [ ] Received too late By Date Remarks PROJECT NAME PACKAGE DESCRIPTION LOCATION DATE PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO END OF SECTION 01600 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by professional engineer. E. Final Property Survey: Submit five copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Closeout Procedures: The following project closeout procedure defines responsibilities of the Contractor, Owner and Architect in closing out the Project: 1. Step 1: The Contractor advises the Architect in writing that he/she has reached “Substantial Completion” and provides a list of items to be completed or corrected. Closeout may be conducted by areas or portions of the Work if requested by the Owner. 2. Step 2: The Architect inspects the Work to determine if it is substantially complete and issues Certificate of Substantial Completion and a “Punch List” of items to be completed or corrected. 3. Step 3: The Contractor completes and/or corrects all punch list items and notifies the Architect, in writing, that the Work is ready for final inspection. At this time, final application for payment is submitted. a. Submit a certified copy of the Architect’s final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. b. Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment payment, complete the following: 1) Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2) 2) Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. c. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. d. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. e. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 4. Step 4: The Architect makes final inspection. When the Work is found to be acceptable under the Contract Documents, and contract is fully performed, the Architect will issue final Certificate for Payment. 5. Additional inspection to the above MAY necessitate back charges to the Contractor for the Architect’s time. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO END OF SECTION 01770 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO END OF SECTION 01781 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes and systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For facilitator and instructor. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors and sectional overhead doors. 2. Equipment, including residential appliances. 3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps and fire-extinguishing systems. 4. Conveying systems, including elevators. 5. Heat generation, including boilers, pumps, and water distribution piping. 6. Refrigeration systems, including cooling towers, condensers, pumps and distribution piping. 7. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal equipment and devices. 8. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 9. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies, and motor controls. 10. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches. 11. Lighting equipment and controls. 12. Communication systems, including surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data, and television equipment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 01820 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02220 - SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Removal and satisfactory disposal of buildings, foundations, fences, signs, structures, pavements, traffic control devices, utilities, and other obstructions not designated or permitted to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 1.02 PERMITS A. CDOT Special Use and Access Permit B. Road Cut (TOV) C. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) D. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) E. CDOT Utility Permits 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect all vegetation, utilities, structures, and other facilities to remain, from damage in manner acceptable to Engineer. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. PART 2 PRODUCTS None PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENTS, CURBS, GUTTER, FLATWORK A. Remove all pavements, curbs, gutter, and flatwork not designated to remain. Where existing construction is to be partially removed, saw edges to remain in place on straight line with vertical face. B. Break up concrete to be broken and left in place so largest fragment does not exceed one (1) square yard surface area. SITE DEMOLITION 02220 – 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.02 BRIDGES, SEWERS, CULVERTS, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Do not remove structures in use until arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. B. For structures removed down to natural stream bottom, remove those parts outside stream to 1' below ground. Remove all portions within limits of new construction as necessary to accommodate new work. C. Maintain satisfactory traffic bypass at all times. 3.03 STRUCTURES Remove structures within project limits or as shown on drawings. Protect portions to remain from damage. Damage to be repaired at Contractor's expense. 3.04 UTILITIES Remove designated utility lines within project limits, properly capping or plugging existing lines to remain. 3.05 DISPOSAL Deposit all removed material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. 3.06 RESTORATION After removal of obstruction, fill and compact to finish grade in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 02220 – 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing of all vegetation and debris within work limits and from borrow pits, and such other areas as required, except objects designated to remain or to be removed. Also includes preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain. B. Related Work: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02220 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 4. Topsoil: Section 02922 1.02 PERMITS A. CDOT Special Use and Access Permit B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) C. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) D. Road Cut E. CDOT Access Permits 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect trees, shrubs and planted areas to remain from damage or from unnecessary vehicular traffic, in manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Protect benchmarks, staking, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from damage. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. Clear and/or grub all surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots, bushes and other protruding obstructions, not designated to remain. 3.02 DISPOSAL Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site to satisfaction of Engineer. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. SITE CLEARING 02230 – 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02230 – 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO Dewatering System 02240 - 1 Strata Vail, Colorado December 13, 2007 SECTION 02240 DEWATERING SYSTEM REVISED 12/20/2013 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Install underdrain including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Solid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe. 2. Squeegee backfill 3. Drain board. 4. Cleanout valve box. 5. Fittings. 6. Pressure relief valves. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Products proposed for construction. B. Schedule for underdrain construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall comply with manufacturer requirements, governing codes and regulations, and these specifications. The contractor(s) performing the work shall be licensed in Colorado. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE A. 12-inch solid PVC pipe shall be SDR 35 PVC, shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3034. B. 8-inch solid PVC pipe shall be SDR 35 PVC, shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3034. C. 4-inch solid PVC pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC, shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3034. 2.2 SQUEEGEE SAND BACKFILL A. Squeegee sand backfill for pipe shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Percent Passing 3/8 Inch #200 100 0-5 The contractor shall submit a sample of proposed backfill material for testing prior to installation. 2.3 CLEANOUT VALVE BOX A. Cleanout valve box shall be cast iron Neenah Foundry R-7506 Series or equivalent if approved in writing by the Engineer prior to installation. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be PVC and appropriate to the type of pipe used and shall meet the requirements of the type of pipe used (see Section 2.01 for details). Dewatering System 02240 - 2 Strata Vail, Colorado December 13, 2007 2.5 DRAINBOARD A. Drain board shall be MiraDRAIN 9000 AND MiraDRAIN HC by CARLISLE COATINGS & WATERPROOFING INCORPORATED or, Engineer Approved Equal. B. Drain board shall have connections and fittings per manufacturer’s recommendations where specific connections are not called out in the construction documents. 2.6 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure relief valves shall be M&H Valve – Pressure Relief Valves “Floor Type” Style F-1493 or Engineer Approved Equal. B. Install floor type pressure relief valves as per manufacturer’s specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trenching shall be executed per the civil section of these specifications and in accordance with 29 CFR Part 1926.650-.652, Subpart P. 3.02 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. All pipe connections shall be secured and glued in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Pipe placement shall be to manufacturer requirements, but generally shall be as follows: (1) Excavate trench to required dimensions and elevations; (2) Place required gravel or squeegee bedding (backfill) in 6-inch lifts to the pipe’s spring line; (3) Call the Engineer to visit the site and to observe placement; (4) Place pipe to required elevations and slopes; (4) Place required gravel or squeegee backfill in 6-inch lifts to a minimum of 12 inches above the pipe; (5) Place suitable backfill in 6-inch lifts over the required gravel or squeegee backfill in accordance with the Geotechnical Engineer’s recommendations; (6) No mechanical compaction shall be used directly above the pipe and within 12 inches of the pipe. B. Drainboard placement shall be to manufacturer requirements. Fittings and connections shall be per plan and in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. END OF SECTION STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design and installation of shoring and underpinning system to protect excavation perimeter from movement or collapse. 2. Protection of adjacent buildings and improvements from movement, settlement or collapse. B. Related Sections: Earthwork: Section 02300 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: Contractor shall be solely responsible for design of shoring and underpinning system as required to resist lateral earth pressures and surcharges due to traffic, storage of materials, adjacent structures and all other loads imposed on adjacent soil during the construction period. Comply with requirements of soil and foundation investigation. Type of system used must be compatible with construction procedures and structural details and acceptable to the Structural Engineer and General Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirement: Obtain permits and permission of adjacent property owners as required. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Investigate to determine the location of adjacent existing underground improvements. B. Subsurface Investigation: A subsurface investigation report has been prepared for the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Excavation Support System: Provide piles, piers, walers, lagging, sheeting, anchors and structures as required. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions to determine shoring and underpinning requirements. Examine existing adjacent improvements to determine their condition before starting work. Record their condition by written report, survey and photographs as required. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Take all necessary precautions and make provisions to protect adjacent existing improvements from damage from shoring, underpinning and excavation operations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Design and install systems as required. B. Make proper allowances for building structure and improvements including waterproofing, damp proofing and foundation drainage systems. C. Install shoring as concrete formwork for outside walls where required. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Make periodic inspections and surveys of existing adjacent improvements. Keep accurate records of movements or changes in their condition. 3.05 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT A. Repair any damage or replace damaged existing adjacent improvements. 3.06 REMOVAL A. Remove shoring and underpinning systems as required after permanent structure is in place. Leave shoring in place where required. END OF SECTION 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation and borrow pits, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials taken from within work limits, including excavation for ditches and channels, inlet and outlet ditches for culverts and structures, all necessary shaping and sloping for the construction, preparation, and completion of all backfill, embankments, subgrade shoulders, slopes, gutters, intersections, approaches, and driveways, to required alignment, grade, and typical cross section shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02220 2. Site Clearing: Section 02230 3. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370 4. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Suitable Material: Earth fill material consisting of on-site or similar non-organic sands, gravels, clays, silts and mixtures thereof with maximum size of 6". Bedrock that breaks down to specified soil types and sizes during excavation, hauling, and placement may be considered as suitable material. 2. Unsuitable Material: Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, muck, peat, organic silt, topsoil, frozen materials, trees, stumps, certain manmade deposits, or industrial waste, sludge or landfill, or other undesirable materials. 3. Unclassified Excavation: Any and all materials, including surface boulders, encountered during construction. Rock formations that can be removed by ripping with D-9 tractor in good repair with single tooth hydraulic ripper are considered as unclassified excavation. 4. Rock Excavation: Rock formations which cannot be excavated without blasting. Includes removal and disposal of all rock. 5. Backfill and Embankment: Embankments, including preparation of area upon which they are to be placed, dikes within or outside right-of-way. Placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable materials have been removed. Placing and compacting of material in holes, pits and other depressions to lines and grades shown on drawings. Use only suitable materials in construction of embankments and backfills. 6. Borrow: Backfill or embankment material which must be acquired from designated borrow areas to make up deficiencies which cannot be completed from excavation within work limits. Borrow material must be approved by the Engineer and Soils Engineer. 7. Proof Rolling: Applying test loads over subgrade surface by means of heavy pneumatic-tired roller of specified design, to locate weak areas in subgrade. EARTHWORK 02300 – 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.02 PERMITS 1. CDOT Special Use and Access Permit 2. Road Cut 3. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) 4. Construction Dewatering (NPDES) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL Any suitable material or borrow as defined above. Free-running water shall be drained from materials before placement. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION WATER Acceptable water shall be provided at Contractor's expense. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION Unclassified Excavation: All excess or unsuitable excavated materials, including rock and boulders, that cannot be used in backfill and embankments, shall be placed in designated disposal areas or disposed of off site. Where shown on drawings or considered necessary, construct intercepting ditches above top of cut slopes and carry to outlets near ends of cuts. To blend intersection of cut slopes with slope of adjacent natural ground surfaces in uniform manner, shape tops of all cut slopes, except those in solid rock, for flattening and rounding in accordance with details shown on drawings. Treat earth overburden above solid rock cuts in same manner as earth cut. Engineer reserves the right to change cut slopes during progress of excavation. Scale all exposed rippable rock cuts of loose, potentially falling rock at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PROOF ROLLING Proof rolling will be required to determine whether certain areas of subgrade meet compaction requirements. Proof roll designated areas with heavy rubber-tired roller approved by Engineer. Areas found to be weak or fail the test shall be repaired in accordance with recommendations by the Engineer. 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Adjust completed subgrade from slope or grade stakes to assure surface width conforms to typical section, dimensions, lines, and grades on drawings. Compact subgrade in accordance with compaction requirements. 3.04 EMBANKMENT AND FILL CONSTRUCTION A. Place earthfill materials for backfill or embankment in thin horizontal layers and compact as specified before next layer is placed. Use effective spreading equipment on each lift to obtain uniform thickness prior to compacting. As compaction of each layer progresses, EARTHWORK 02300 – 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 continuously level and manipulate to assure uniform density. Add or remove water as necessary to obtain maximum density. When directed by Engineer, remove excess moisture in bridging across streams, ponds, and swampy ground. Place embankment in layers not greater than 18" which have been demonstrated to meet compaction standards. B. When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time, slopes which are steeper than 4:1 measured longitudinally or at right angles to roadway shall be continuously benched over as work is brought up in layers. Benching shall be well keyed into existing slopes a minimum of 8' wide. Begin each horizontal bench at intersection of original ground and sides of previous benches. Material benched shall be excavated and recompacted along with new embankment material at Contractor's expense. C. Rock fill embankment material consists predominantly of rock 6" to 12” in diameter placed in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer provided material is carefully placed, large stones well distributed, and voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer with suitable equipment, distributing soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. Embankments consisting predominantly of rock larger than 8" in greatest dimension, shall not be constructed above an elevation 2' below finished subgrade. Balance of embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 8" in loose thickness and compacted as specified. D. Remove all sod and vegetable matter from surface upon which embankment is to be placed. Completely break up cleared surface by plowing, scarifying, or stepping a minimum of 6" to insure a bond between embankment and original ground. Recompact to specifications. E. Frozen materials shall not be used in construction of embankments. F. During construction maintain area in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. G. At the end of every construction day all fill areas must be flat rolled to provide proper drainage. 3.05 BORROW Provide test pit if required by Engineer to evaluate acceptability and limits of source at Contractor's expense. If more borrow is placed than required, amount of overrun will be deducted from borrow volume. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 10 working days in advance of need before opening borrow area. Strip all borrow pits of sod, topsoil, and unsuitable materials. Restore borrow area, grade and shape to provide proper drainage before placement of topsoil, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. EARTHWORK 02300 – 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Deposit all surplus materials or unsuitable materials in such places as designated on drawings or approved by Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. 3.07 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Thoroughly scarify surface upon which embankment is to be placed to depth of 6”. B. Compact scarified materials and embankments to following % AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum for granular soils. For clay soils moisture content shall be 0 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content. 1. Landscaped area 95% 2. Roadway 100% 3. Interior Slab on Grade 100% 4. Beneath Structure Foundation 100% 5. Hardscape (sidewalk, paver, flatwork) 100% C. Where Engineer agrees to rock fill material embankments constructed without moisture and density control, place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension not exceeding 2'. Apply water as necessary to facilitate compaction. Route construction equipment, compactors, or both, uniformly over each lift prior to placing additional lifts. Apply sufficient compactive effort to each lift to achieve uniform, well-compacted rock fill. Distribute rocks throughout layer, spaced far enough apart to allow compaction equipment to pass between and permit cross rolling. Place, move and compact embankment materials, and apply water to facilitate compaction and prevent voids in embankment. Number of passes required will depend on available compaction equipment to achieve compactive effort agreed to by Engineer. END OF SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02300 – 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02315 - LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, placing and curing of flow-fill in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 2. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Data: Additives, curing compounds. B. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content, admixtures. C. Placement: Method proposed, if requested. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. B. Hot Weather: When air temperature in shade exceeds 90 degrees F, concrete mix at delivery shall not exceed 80 degrees F. Fog sprayers or special wetting agents may be required for protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT AASHTO M 85, TYPE II, 50 pounds/cubic yard. Contractor may substitute 30 lbs/cy of cement and 31 lbs/cy of fly ash. LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02315 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.02 AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate - AASHTO M 6, 1650 to 1850 pounds/cubic yard B. Coarse Aggregate - AASHTO No. 57 or 67, 1650 to 1750 pounds/cubic yard 2.03 WATER 325 pounds/cubic yard (or as needed) The amount of water shall be such that the flow-fill flows into place properly without excessive segregation. Approximately 39 gallons of water per cubic yard of flow-fill is normally needed. 2.04 FLOW FILL REQUIREMENTS A. Compressive Strength: Less than 100 psi B. Slumps greater than 6 inches C. Entrained Air: 10% to 15% 2.05 QUALITY Follow agreed mix design PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND FLOW-FILL Unsuitable foundation material shall be removed and wasted in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Unsuitable foundation material which is suitable for embankments and suitable surplus excavated material shall be used in the construction of embankments. Unsuitable material removed below designed elevation shall be replaced with approved material. Rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material encountered in trenches for culvert pipe or conduit shall be removed below the designed grade for a minimum depth of 300 mm (12 inches). This extra depth excavations shall be backfilled with loose flow-fill (Class 1) or other approved material. The base of flow-fill shall be scarified to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and compacted with moisture and density control prior to placement of any structural backfill. 3.02 PLACEMENT Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times, except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little re-handling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02315 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.03 COMPACTION Compaction of flow-fill will not be required. The maximum layer thickness for flow-fill shall be 1m (3 feet). Additional layers shall not be placed until the flow-fill has lost sufficient moisture to be walked on without indenting more the 50 mm (2 inches). Any damage resulting from placing flow-fill in layers that are too thick or from not allowing sufficient time between placement of layers shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. When the Contractor substitutes flow-fill (Class 1) or (Class 2), the trench width may be reduced to provide a minimum 150 mm (6 inch) clearance between the outside diameter of culverts and trench walls or for conduits as specified on the plans or shown on details. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain four (4) test cylinders of flow fill for each batch of flow fill. B. One slump test for each set of cylinders. C. Obtain entrained air content for each set of cylinders. D. Obtain unit weight for each set of cylinders. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. B. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures (calcium chloride) are not acceptable for freeze protection. C. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. 3.07 CLEANUP After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and clean work area. LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02315 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02315 LEAN CONCRETE/FLOW-FILL 02315 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02370 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, grading, and installation of riprap, filter material, jute netting, straw bale sediment barriers, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 2. Earthwork: Section 02300 3. Storm Drainage: Section 02630 4. Topsoil: Section 02922 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory 1. Gradation and Soundness of Riprap. 2. Gradation of Filter Material. 1.03 PERMITS A. Construction Dewatering B. Stormwater Discharge Permit (NPDES) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIPRAP Hard, dense, sound, angular rough fractured stone meeting AASHTO T 85. Excavated shot rock may be used if agreed to by the Owner's representative and the Engineer. Neither breadth nor thickness of single stone to be less than one-third its length. Nominal Size Min. Volume Min. Weight 9" 0.25 CF 30 lbs. 12" 0.5 CF 75 lbs. 18" 1.8 CF 250 lbs. 24" 4 CF 600 lbs. Size of stone and total thickness of riprap as shown on drawings. Stone well graded so voids can be filled, and at least 50% of mass equal to or larger than size called for on drawings. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.02 FILTER MATERIAL Aggregate Filter: Conform to following gradation: Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3” 100 3/4" 20-90 No. 4 0-20 No. 200 0-3 2.03 FILTER FABRIC Manufactured especially for stability of erosion control construction. Made from polyethylene and polypropylene yarns, in accordance with following: Weight 4.0 oz/yd ASTM D1910 Thickness 15 mils ASTM D1777 Grab Strength 130 lbs. ASTM D1682 Elongation Break 62% ASTM D1682 Burst Strength 125 psi ASTM D7742 Trapezoid Tear Strength 70 lb. ASTM 2263 Water Permeability 0.02 cm/se CFMC Water Flow Rate 4.80 gal/min/ft CFMC Equivalent Opening Size 70-100 U.S. Sieve ASTM D422 2.04 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MATS A. Install Landlok 450 TRM, C2 Fabric or as shown on plans 2.05 SILT FENCE A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications: Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 ASTM D1682 Elongation at Failure (%) 50 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786 Puncture Strength (lbs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified) Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3 Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Std Sieve CW-02215 Ultraviolet Radiation Stability % 90 ASTM-G-26 B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long. Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of 3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot. C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a maximum 6" mesh opening, or as approved. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer's instructions. 2.06 SILT SACK A. SILTSACK Fabric: The Siltsack fabric will be manufactured from a woven polypropylene fabric that meets or exceeds the following specifications. PROPERTIES TEST METHOD UNITS GRAB TENSILE STRENGTH ASTM D-4632 300 lbs GRAB TENSILE ELONGATION ASTM D-4632 20 % PUNCTURE ASTM D-4833 120 lbs MULLEN BURST ASTM D-3786 800psi TRAPEZOID TEAR ASTM D-4533 120 lbs UV RESISTANCE ASTM D-4355 80 % APPARENT OPENING SIZE ASTM D-4751 40 US Sieve FLOW RATE ASTM D-4491 40 gal/min/SF PERMITTIVITY ASTM D-4491 0.55sec-1 2.07 EROSION LOGS (WATTLES) A. Sediment Logs shall be made of Aspen Excelsior fibers encased in an outside open weave containment fabric. Fibers shall be curled with soft, interlocking barbs to form a strong, organic filtration matrix. A minimum of 80 percent of the fibers shall be 15cm (6in) or greater in length. Fibers shall be evenly distributed throughout the diameter and length of the Sediment Log. Excelsior fibers shall be weed seed free. Excelsior color shall be standard Aspen (natural). Netting at each end of the log shall be secured to assure fiber containment. 2.08 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Stabilized construction entrance shall have a minimum width of 10-feet and a minimum length of 50-feet. A twelve (12) inch high diversion ridge shall be constructed 15 feet from the existing roadway. Stabilized construction entrance shall be graded to drain towards the construction site at two-percent (2%) slope. Rock shall be two inch crushed screened rock. Rock shall be placed to a depth of at least six (6) inches. Type I* Type II* Type III* Type IV* Nominal Diameter 50 cm (20 in) 30 cm (12 in) 23 cm (9 in) 15 cm (6 in) Length 3.05 m (10 ft) 3.05 m (10 ft) 7.62 m (25 ft) 7.62 m (25 ft) Weight (±10%) 13.62 kg (30 lb) 9.08 kg (20 lb) 11.35 kg (25 lb) 5.45 kg (12 lb) Net Opening 2.5 cm (1 in) 2.5 cm (1 in) 1.9 cm (.75 in) 1.3 cm (.5 in) EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FILTER FABRIC Place fabric over shaped surface loosely where, when large stones are placed, they will not cause stretching of fabric beyond elastic limits. Overlap joining sections 2' at edges. Secure overlapped edges to subgrade with cinch pins. If riprap is dropped, place aggregate bedding 2" thick over fabric. Place riprap in a manner that fabric will not be damaged by stretching, punching, or ripping. 3.02 RIPRAP A. Angular reasonably well-graded from smallest to maximum size specified. Stones smaller than 10% of smallest size not permitted. Control gradation of riprap by visual inspection to assure thickness of riprap conforms with drawings. B. Hand Placed: Rectangular to facilitate butt placement. Fill openings with loose, well- graded road aggregate base material. 3.03 FILTER MATERIAL Wet subgrade, reasonably shape, and compact prior to placing filter material. Filter material may be backdragged with loader bucket to a reasonably smooth surface for placement to lines and grades of drawings. 3.04 SILT SACK Install silt sack in accordance with drawings. 3.05 EROSION LOGS (WATTLES) Sediment Log consists of an outside, open weave, containment fabric filled with Aspen curled excelsior fibers. Its purpose is to provide a flexible, lightweight, porous, sediment control device demonstrating the ability to conform to terrain details and dissipate water velocity in concentrated flow areas. Straw Wattles can be installed on contour of slope, with a slight downslope angle at the end of each row to allow for slow drainage during heavy precipitation. They can also be used at the top of slopes to prevent sheeting over the edge, and they can be used at the toe of slopes. Straw Wattles can also be used along sidewalks and curbs and around storm drains and inlets to prevent sediment pollution. They can also be placed in drainage swales to slow flows and capture sediment: they can be used as level spreaders to prevent concentrated flow, and in place of earthen berms or dikes. The height of a Straw Wattle is 9 in., the installed height is approximately 5 -7 inches. Straw Wattles should be installed in shallow trenches, 2 - 4 in. deep, depending on soil type and slope steepness. Dig the deeper trench for soft, loamy soils and steepest slopes: dig the shallower trench for hard, rocky soils and gentler slopes. Use shovel to dig the trench, throwing excavated soil to the up hill side to prevent run off from undercutting the Wattle. Lay the Wattle in the trench and stake with wood stakes at each end and 4-foot on center. When installing running lengths, Straw Wattle ends should be buttoned firmly together to prevent leakage, and securely staked together. DO NOT OVERLAP. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.06 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Clear the area of debris, rocks or plants that will interfere with installation. Grade the area for the entrance to flow back on to the construction site. Runoff from the stabilized construction entrance onto a public street will not be allowed except for the first 15 feet connecting to the public street. Place geotextile fabric/filter fabric prior to placing rock. Place rock as required. 3.08 SEDIMENT POND/TRAP A. Construct pond per plans and as directed by Engineer. B. The area under embankment shall be cleared, grubbed and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. C. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots or other woody vegetation as well as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Maximum height of embankment shall be 4’ measured at centerline of embankment. D. All cut and fill slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter. E. Geotextile Class C shall be placed over riser. Fabric shall be embedded at least 6” into existing ground at bottom of pond. F. Outlet – An outlet shall include a means of conveying the discharge in a erosion free manner to an existing stable channel. Protection against scour at the discharge point shall be provided as necessary. G. Outlet channel must have positive drainage from the trap. H. Sediment shall be removed and trap restored to its original dimensions when the sediment has accumulated to ½ of the wet storage depth of the trap (900 cf/ac). Removed sediment shall be deposited in a suitable area and in such a manner that it will not erode. I. The structure shall be inspected periodically after each rain and repaired as needed. J. Construction of traps shall be carried out in such a manner that sediment pollution is abated. Points of concentrated inflow shall be protected. K. The structure shall be dewatered by approved methods, removed and the area stabilized when the drainage area has been properly stabilized. 3.09 SILT FENCE Install silt fence in accordance with drawings. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTINALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02370 – 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, vaults, service lines, curb stops, valve boxes, pressure reducing valves, meters, and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation; All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for water lines as adopted by Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Valves and Valve Boxes 2. Fittings 3. Fire Hydrants 4. Vaults 5. Service Lines 6. Meters B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. D. Certificates: Submit copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS – All materials shall conform to the local water district’s specifications. 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS All ductile iron pipe and fittings used shall meet the latest AWWA Specifications. A. Pipe 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 350 psi, minimum thickness class 52, with cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Pipe joints, push-on type utilizing rubber ring gasket, AWWA C111. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi, with push-on joints ASTM D1869. six inch (6"), eight inch (8") and twelve inch (12") PVC water lines shall be Class 200 dimension ratio 14 (DR 14). PVC pipe may be used only in corrosive areas and in the Edwards Metropolitan District provided the static water pressure does not exceed 170 psi. Installation of PVC pipe in corrosive areas must have prior written authorizations from the District. 3. Steel Pipe: All steel pipe and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C200 Standard for Steel Water Pipe-eight inches (8”) and larger-and AWWA M-11 Steel Pipe Manual. Working pressure shall be 350 psi. All material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates of Structural Quality or ASTM A36 Standard Specifications for Structural Steel. For mill-type pipe, all material used shall be acceptable under ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. All fittings shall be fabricated from tested pipe and dye checked in accordance with AWWA C208. All steel pipe and fittings shall be prepared, primed, lined, coated, painted or wrapped as hereinafter specified: a. Exterior Surfaces – Tape coating system conforming to AWWA C209 and C214. b. Interior Surfaces – Cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C205. 4. HDPE Pipe: With authorization from the engineer and approval by the District, this pipe may be used as an alternative in those applications where “hot soils” are determined to be found. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 5. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating shall be a minimum of one-mil (1) thick. 6. Joint Restraint Devices: Joint restraint devices shall be made of ductile iron. Twist-off nuts, sized the same as the tee-head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices. Joint restraint devices shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Series 1100 or 1700 or Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1400 for new pipe restraint and EBAA Iron Sales, Megalug Series 1100SD or 1100HD or Uni-Flange UFR1300-C or UFR1390-C for existing pipe restraint or accepted equal. 7. Solid Sleeves: Solid sleeves shall be made of ductile iron, mechanical joint, long body. Sleeves shall have a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Where a solid sleeve is used to join two pieces of pipe of the same diameter, a “wedding band” is to be inserted between the two pipes inside of the solid sleeve. 8. Tapping Sleeves: Wet taps shall only be made with the use of a tapping sleeve. The District will allow epoxy-coated Smith Blair 620, Mueller H304, JCM 412 or equivalent. No tapping sleeves will be allowed for any application with a working pressure of 150 psi or higher. For those applications where working pressure exceeds 150 psi, the District will require the use of a tee. B. Fittings Fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C153, pressure rating 350 psi. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts shall be low-alloy steel. All fittings cement-mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. 2.02 VALVES The valves shall be the same size as the main. A. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be Mueller A-2360, Waterous AFC-2500 or U.S. Pipe Metroseal with an epoxy-coated interior and exterior cast iron or ductile iron body, pressure rating 250 psi, bronze-mounted, AWWA C509. Resilient seat (wedge) rubber encapsulated gate, flanged or mechanical joint as required. Valves with ring stem seal, two-inch (2”) square operating nut, open left must be used. Resilient wedge gate valves on all pipe sizes up to and including 12 inches are required. Direction of Opening: All valves are to open left. Specifications: Gate valves in sizes through twenty-four inches (24”) shall be of the iron body, non-rising bronze stem, resilient seated wedge type manufactured to equal or exceed ANSI/AWWA Standard C509-80 and the specific requirements outlined in these Special Provisions. Valves shall have a bottle-tight working water pressure of 250 psi with zero leakage and be capable of flow in either direction. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 End connections shall be mechanical joint and shall be furnished with all necessary joint materials. Valve openings shall be furnished and installed with valve stacks and covers in accordance with locate water district specifications. Valve body, bonnet, stuffing box and disc cast shall be manufactured of either gray or ductile iron. The exterior of the valve shall have epoxy coating per AWWA standards, applied to the ferrous parts of the valve, except for finished or seating surfaces. All internal ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with a two-part thermosetting epoxy coating. The coating shall be non-toxic, impart no taste to water, protect all seating and adjacent surfaces from corrosion and prevent build-up of scale or tuberculation. The valve shall be structurally designed so that if excessive torque is applied to the stem in the closing direction, with the disc seated, failure of the pressure retaining parts does not occur. Stem failure under such conditions shall occur externally at such a point as to enable the stem to be safely turned in the opening direct by use of a pipe wrench. B. Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be Tyler 6668-2. All buried valves shall be provided with a six-inch (6”) cast iron, valve box, screw type. The valve box shall be of a design which will not transmit shock or stress to the valve and which shall have enough extension capability to be raised to final street grade. The valve box shall be cast iron, adjustable screw type, with minimum five-inch (5”) diameter shaft provided with cover, marked “Water”. C. Pressure Reducing Valves All pressure reducing valves shall be CLA-VAL 92G-01ABXCKDS as appropriate and determined by the Engineer. In addition, the PRV is to have the following features: 1. Pressure reducing pilotry with pressure control ranges for correct valve operation where installed. Pilot material shall be bronze body only, brass and stainless- steel trim. Tubing shall be copper. 2. Epoxy coated interior and exterior suitable for potable water contact. 3. Dura-clean stem design shall be installed. 4. Valve opening shall be regulated by means of a “speed control valve” for flow control. 5. Ductile iron, globe body, minimum 150-pound ANSI flanges or as may be required by system pressures, bronze trim. 6. Pilotry flow-clean strainer and minimum of three (3) pilot cocks. D. Pressure Reducing Valves-Bypass Line The PRV shall be CLA-VAL 90-01 valve, sized appropriately to allow low flow to bypass around the main PRV. The valve shall have a ductile iron globe body with screwed ends. Pilotry is to be equipped with a flow wye strainer and isolation cocks. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 E. Air Release/Vacuum Valves Shall be an APCO air vacuum combination valve sized by the engineer as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation or an equivalent valve that has been approved by the local water district. The valve shall have a cast iron body, cover and baffle with a stainless-steel float. The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover, without distortion and shall be easily removed, if necessary. Air release/vacuum valves shall be installed at all high points in the system on any main line extensions. F. Check Valves Golden-Anderson Silent Check Valve (Figure 280). Bronze mounted, AWWA C508. High strength cast iron gate with bronze gate ring. Bronze, back-faced seat ring. Solid bronze Y-shaped hinge. 2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion A423, mountain hydrant which conform to AWWA Standard C502 with a working pressure of 250 psi. They also shall be six-inch (6”) mechanical joint inlet, minimum 5¼ inches, compression-type main valve that closes with pressure, two 2½ hose nozzles, one 4½-inch pump nozzle, nozzle threads ANSI B26. Nozzles must be easily replaceable in the field with standard tools. Operating and cap nuts must be 1½-inch, Number 17 National Standard hex main valve which open to the LEFT. An arrow cast on top of hydrant shall indicate direction opening. These shall be a breakable section that permits clean break at or near ground level, preventing water loss in case of breakage. Working parts must be removable for maintenance or repair without excavation. Also required are operating mechanism non-wetting, oil reservoir lubricated, with O-ring seals and barrel drain bronze mounted with at least two (2) outlets, which operate automatically with main valve. Fire hydrants must be installed at the end of all main lines. Finish grade of the fire hydrant shall be twelve inches (12”) below the flange for final grade and paving inspection. B. Fire Hydrant Extensions New Installations: All new installations shall be installed at the standard 7-foot to 9-foot of cover measured from the top of the pipe to finish grade. All fire hydrants shall consist of a single solid shaft. No fire hydrant extensions will be allowed. Any special circumstance will require written approval from the local water district prior to installation. Existing Fire Hydrants: No more than one (1), two-foot (2’) long, fire hydrant grade extension (extension section) shall be used or installed on fire hydrant assemblies. All hydrants shall be installed with a guard valve to isolate the hydrant for repair while maintaining service to main. No service line taps will be allowed between the guard valve and hydrant. Guard valves shall be installed on the tee off of the water main. The maximum distance from the guard valve to the fire hydrant shall not exceed fifty feet (50’) Fire hydrants shall be installed at the end of all dead-end mains. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Fire Hydrant Marker Flags Install fire hydrant marker flags for all newly constructed fire hydrants. The required flat is a Nordic Flex Flag, FF2-72 inches. 2.04 SERVICE LINES A. Copper Tubing Type "K", ASTM B88. Connections to be compression or silver soldered. B. Corporation Stops Mueller 300 Ball Valve No. B-25008 or B25028, AWWA C800. All brass construction with compression connection. McDonald No. 4701 BT or 4704 BT, AWWA C800. Ford cc/comp FB-1000-G Ford IPS/comp FB-1100-G C. Curb Stops Mueller 300 Ball Curve Valve No. 25209, Ford B44 with compression connections, AWWA C-800. McDonald Ball Curb Valve - 6100 T, AWWA C800. D. Curb Boxes For curb stops up to 1”: Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid or McDonald 5601 with 5601L lid. For curb stops larger than 1”: Mueller H10314 with 89982 lid and Tyler 6500 Series Enlarged Base #144809 or McDonald 5603 with 5601L lid. Shaft diameter shall be 1” and the top of the shaft shall be a minimum of 18” from final grade and lid. E. Saddles Ductile Iron Saddle: Mueller DE2A, JCM-402, Smith & Blair 313, Ford F202, McDonald 3825, 3826 or equal and approved by the District. The saddle must have a double flat strap design with ductile iron body. Said saddle must conform to AWWA C800. 2.05 METERS Rockwell SR Compound Meter A. All services are required to have a positive displacement Rockwell meter with ECR touch-read pad. Conformance per AWWA C702 Standard for Cold Water Meters - Compound Type. 1. SR 2. SR2 3. Compound 4. Meter type will be determined by the District. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Installation must be in freeze-proof, accessible area. C. A telephone jack must be installed within five feet (5') of the meter to provide for future automated meter reading. D. Installation will be near floor level in a horizontal position. Isolation valves shall be located before the PRV and after the meter (i.e. valve, PRV, meter, valve). E. Customer shall install wire from meter location to touch-read pad prior to meter installation. F. Touch-read pad will be located on street side of building, five feet (5') above the ground in an accessible location free from snow. G. Master Meter Vaults: All master meter vaults will be required to have a six inch (6") Rockwell turbine meter with a two inch (2") positive displacement low flow meter. The Contractor will be required to submit a piping schematic to the District and Engineer prior to any installation. Refer to Details for additional information. 2.06 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1 ½ inch maximum, and maximum of 10% of pipe diameter to ½ inch 100 100 No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Requirement Tamp to spring line to fill voids below pipe haunches 90% of Standard Proctor placed at +/- 3% of Optimum Moisture The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1½ inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding ¾ inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4 (4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 7 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the potential effects of groundwater interception by the bedding material should be considered. Groundwater interception may be controlled by: constructing check dams with low permeable material at intervals in the bedding; providing drainage to daylight at intervals along the pipe; substituting low permeable bedding; or a combination of these. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor (ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a ½ sack (50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1½ inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over six inches (6") in diameter in top twelve inches (12") of trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than eighteen inches (18") in diameter shall be backfilled in the trench. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 8 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of “blue” marking tape is required on all water mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately twenty-four inches (2’) above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: A. Four (4) mil thick PVC material. B. Solid “blue” color with black lettering C. Six inches (6”) in width 2.09 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials shall be furnished from sources agreed to by the Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 9 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.11 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C105, with the following additional requirements. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1, in accordance with ASTM D-1248. 2.12 THRUST BLOCKS AND ANCHORS Concrete thrust blocks and anchors shall be sized for the internal pipe pressure and soil bearing capacity. Standard sizes and shapes of thrust blocks and anchors are shown on the details. No thrust block shall be smaller than that size required for an eight inch (8") main. Thrust reaction blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand and 5 parts stone, and having a compressive strength of not less than 3000 P.S.I. after 28 days. Megalug joint restraint devices shall be used in conjunction with thrust blocks. All thrust blocks shall be formed in accordance with the local water district’s specifications. See ERWSD 2006 Standards Specifications for detail. The Water District shall inspect all thrust blocks. 2.13 PRESSURE REDUCER VAULTS All proposed installations shall be “factory-built” vault including the appropriately sized main line inlet and outlet. PRV installations shall include an appropriately sized manual bypass with an approved gate valve; two (2) appropriately sized CLA-VAL Model 90G-01ABK pressure reducing valves with approved isolating gate valves. All vault installations shall include a 120/240-volt power panel; all assembled, tested and painted. Minimum dimensions of the vault shall be 7’ (H) x 8’ (L) x 6’ (W), skid – mounted capsule with Bilco Model MNB-50 access hatch, ladder, fluorescent light, gravity drain in sump, dehumidifier, 240 volt heater, exhaust fan and two (2) magnesium anode packs. All proposed vault installations must be pre-approved by the local water district. 2.14 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Trench Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 10 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24- hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Deliver, handle, store, and install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable paragraphs of AWWA C600, AWWA C603, and ASTM D2321. Carefully examine all pipe and fittings for cracks and other defects. Groove in bells of ductile iron pipe to be full and continuous or be rejected. Remove all foreign matter from interior and ends of pipe and appurtenances before lowering into trench. Carefully lower all pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench piece by piece to prevent damage to pipe materials, protective coatings, and linings. Do not dump into trench. If pipe cannot be lowered into trench and into place without getting earth into it, place heavy, tightly woven canvas bag over each end and leave in place until joints are made. During pipe laying, place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in pipe. Keep trenches free from water during pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering of trench considered as incidental to construction an all costs included in contract prices. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by watertight plug, or other means approved by Engineer. B. Deflection of Pipe: Pipe deflections are discouraged. Do not exceed 50% of the deflection limits for each type of pipe as recommended by pipe manufacturer. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 11 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Pipe Jointing 1. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces in neat and workmanlike manner with no damage to pipe or lining. Leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. 2. Mechanical Joints: Thoroughly clean last 8" of spigot and inside bell to remove oil, grit, tar, and other foreign matter. Coat spigot and gasket with solution furnished by pipe manufacturer. Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward spigot end. Coat gasket with joint lubricant and place on spigot end of pipe to be laid, with thick edge toward gland. Push entire section forward to seat spigot in bell of pipe in place. Press gasket into place within bell, even around entire joint. Move ductile-iron gland along pipe into position for bolting all nuts with suitable torque wrench. Alternately tighten nuts 180 degrees apart to produce equal pressure on all parts of gland. Pipe Size Bolt Size Range of Torque Inches Inches Ft.-Lb. 3" 5/8 45 - 60 4"-24" 3/4 75 - 90 3. Push-on Joints: Thoroughly clean exterior 4" of pipe spigot and inside of adjoining bell to remove all oil, grit, tar, and other matter. Place gasket in bell with large round side of gasket pointing inside pipe bell. Apply thin film joint lubricant over gasket's entire exposed surface. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and insert into bell to contact gasket. Force pipe into bell to manufacturer's jointing mark. 4. Flanged Joints: Thoroughly clean faces of flanges of all oil, grease, and other material. Thoroughly clean rubber gaskets and check for proper fit. Assure proper seating of flanged gasket. Tighten blots so pressure on gasket is uniform. Use torque wrenches to insure uniform bearing. If joints leak when hydrostatic test applied, remove and replace gaskets and retighten bolts. D. Thrust Restraint: Concrete thrust blocks are required. 3.05 SANITARY SEWER CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.06 TAPPING PIPE Use experienced workmen with tools in good repair and proper adapters for size of pipe being tapped. Drilling and tapping machines proposed for tapping directly into pipe agreed to by WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 12 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Engineer. If tap is improperly installed with leakage around threads or, in opinion of Engineer, connection is substandard, provide tap saddle at Contractors' expense. If damage to pipe cannot be repaired by saddle, install approved repair sleeve over injured portion and retap at Contractor's expense. Install corporation stop and couplings, flanged coupling adapters, and service saddles to provide clean seat. Wipe gaskets clean before installation. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated for installation on pipe ends. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressively from opposite sides until all bolts have uniform tightness. Use torque wrenches or other approved equipment. 3.07 SERVICE LINE Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to curb stop or meter, in shortest direct route by continuous section of pipe with no splices. Locate 10' horizontally from all sewer lines. Terminate near center of each lot or as shown on drawings. 3.08 VALVES AND HYDRANTS Carefully inspect valve and hydrant before installation. Clean interior. Operate valve and hydrant to determine parts in proper working order, with valves seating and drain valve operating properly. Set plumb and securely braced into place. Set hydrant with bury line at finish grade, with hose nozzles parallel to and pumper nozzle facing pavement, at least 6" behind curb or sidewalk and 18" from property line or as shown on drawings. Provide drainage pit having 9 square feet of surface area and 2' of depth below seep hole. Backfill pits with 1-1/2" washed rock to 6" above barrel drain hole. Provide thrust blocking at bowl of each hydrant as shown on drawings. Do not obstruct barrel drain hole. Hydrants and valves backfilled by installing 1-1/2" aggregate road base to subgrade. Valve boxes centered and plumb over the operating nut. Valve boxes supported by bricks or other means to prevent any shock or stress transmitted to pipe or valve. Set valve box covers to just below subgrade level to prevent damage during construction of surfacing if applicable. Adjust to grade of surfacing. 3.09 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS Install standard plugs or caps at dead ends of all fittings and pipe in accordance with drawings. If dead end is not to be extended, place water service line as near dead end as practical. 3.10 VAULTS Construct vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.11 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 13 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, from rain, and flowing water for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.12 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 85 to 90%, AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No boulders over 6" in diameter in top 12" trench. No backfill material with boulders larger than 18" in diameter. Carefully lower boulders larger than 12" in diameter into trench until backfill is 4' over top of pipe. 3.13 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 100%, AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2% of optimum. 2. Predominately of rock, to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.14 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with a cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these Specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 14 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Hydrostatic Testing 1. General: Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Test two or more valved sections not to exceed 1000 feet. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Lay no additional pipe until first test section has passed tests. Furnish the following equipment and materials for tests, unless otherwise directed by Engineer: 2 Graduated containers 2 Pressure gauges 1 Suitable hose and suction pipe as required 2. Testing Procedure: Test each 1000 feet of line installed while trench is partially backfilled and joints are left exposed for examination for leaks. Do not conduct pressure tests until 48 hours after placement of concrete thrust blocks. After pipe has been partially backfilled, slowly let water into line. Vent to allow air in line to be released. Flush line as necessary for cleaning. Leave water in line for 24 hours prior to pressure test. Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure, calculated for low point of test section, or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Valve off pump and hold pressure in line for test. Test for two hours or as agreed to by Engineer. At end of test, operate pump until test pressure is again attained. Calibrate container of water for pump suction to determine amount of water to replace leakage. 3. Leakage Allowance: Leakage is quantity of water necessary to refill line at end of test period. No installation will be accepted until leakage is less than: ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE PER 1000' OF PIPE IN GPH Avg. Test Nominal Pipe Diameter - in. Pressure psi 6 8 10 12 18 200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.91 175 0.59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1.79 150 0.55 0.74 0.92 1.10 1.66 125 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.51 100 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.35 *For pipe with 18' nominal lengths. To obtain recommended allowable leakage for pipe with 20' nominal lengths, multiply the leakage calculated from the table by 0.9. If pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size. Reduce allowable leakage proportionately for sections less than 1000 ft. WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 15 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.16 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING A. General: In accordance with AWWA C601. Acceptable chlorine disinfectants are calcium hypochlorite granules and sodium hypochlorite solutions. B. Chlorine-water solution method: Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe - by Diameter Pipe 100 Percent 1 Percent Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution In. Lb. Gal. 4 .013 .16 6 .030 .36 8 .054 .65 10 .085 1.02 12 .120 1.44 16 .217 2.60 Induce chlorine solution into pipeline at a continuous feed rate to attain a concentration of 25 Mg/L free chlorine. C. Chlorination Test: Assure valves are closed on existing system to prevent chlorine solution flowing into existing system. Retain 25 mg/L chlorinated water in pipeline for minimum of 24 hours. During retention period operate all valves and hydrants to disinfect. At end of 24 hour period, chlorine in system to be no less than 10 mg/L throughout length tested. When section being tested meets 10 mg/L chlorine after 24 hours, flush main. Water samples taken shall show no coliform organisms. If water in pipe does not meet the governing health agency requirements, repeat disinfection procedure, at Contractor's expense, until requirements are met. Furnish acceptance forms from governing agency to Engineer. 3.17 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. END OF SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 16 Alpine Engineering, Inc Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, service wyes, service lines, force mains and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a CAT 375 backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications for sewer lines as approved by the Eagle River Water and Sanitation District. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and manholes; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 4"-15", ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35; 18"-27", ASTM F679. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 13'. B. Ductile Iron: AWWA C151, Class 52. Push-on joints. Poly-lined or Griffin “Sewer Coat” ASTM A746. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Yelomine: Restrained joint PVC pressure pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2241 "Standard Specifications for PVC, pressure rated pipe (SDR Series)". D. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Couplings: AWWA C900, working pressure 200 psi with push-on joints ASTM D1869. Transition coupling from SDR35 to C-900, pressure pipe shall be Harco Manufacturing 337-080, Class 150 and ASTM3139. All spigot ends shall be beveled to manufacturer’s specifications. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Manhole bases: Precast concrete ASTM C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete (wetcast) with the lip outside with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. C. Manhole Rings and Covers: Cast iron, ASTM A48 with a flat lid with the lettering “Sewer” cast on the cover. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 255 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. HS20 traffic loading. D&L A-1043 or accepted equal. D. Manhole Grade Rings: An alternative to concrete grade rings is high-density polyethylene (HDPE) as defined in ASTM D1248-84 with a “wedge” design. E. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of a vertical load of 800 pounds and a pullout load of 1500 pounds (ASTM-C478), six inches (6”) from face of manhole. The steps shall meet industry standards or equal and be plastic coated. F. Manhole Joint Sealant: Double Rub-R-Nek with primer. One inch (1") on 48"-inch diameter manholes; 1½- inch on all larger numbers. 2.03 BEDDING Two types of bedding material are allowed: Screened rock and soil or select imported material, meeting the following gradation specification table: Sieve Size Total Percent Passing by Weight Screened Rock Soil or Select Import 1 ½ inch maximum, and maximum of 10% of pipe diameter to ½ inch 100 100 No. 4 0 to 10 30 to 100 No. 200 0 to 5 0 to 50 Minimum Compaction Requirement Tamp to spring line to fill voids below pipe haunches 90% of Standard Proctor placed at +/- 3% of Optimum Moisture SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 The maximum particle size of pipe bedding should generally not exceed 1½ inches or 10 percent of the nominal pipe diameter, whichever is less. Bedding for small pipe such as service lines should generally have a maximum particle size not exceeding ¾ inch. Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic material, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious material. Screened rock used for waterline or sewer pipe bedding should be crushed, angular material that meets the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IA bedding material. The material should have not more than 10 percent passing the No. 4 (4.75 millimeter) screen, and less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 (75 micrometer) screen. The bedding should be tamped under the haunches of the pipe to spring line. Where future excavation is anticipated, the sloughing properties of screened rock when unconfined should be taken into consideration. The District may require soil or select import. Where groundwater may be present, the potential effects of groundwater interception by the bedding material should be considered. Groundwater interception may be controlled by: constructing check dams with low permeable material at intervals in the bedding; providing drainage to daylight at intervals along the pipe; substituting low permeable bedding; or a combination of these. Compacted pipe bedding should meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321, Class IB, Class II, or Class III bedding material. The material should have a minimum of 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen and less than 50 percent passing the No. 200 screen. Class 6 aggregate base course per CDOT Table 703.2 conforms to this gradation criteria. The bedding should be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent at +/- 3 percent of optimum moisture content, referencing Standard Proctor (ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Material containing 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 4 screen can be used with the following considerations: materials in this range can be expected to possess properties similar to screened rock except that compaction will be required and materials in this range may be too free-draining to be testable for compaction by ASTM D698. Flow-fill, a ½ sack (50 pounds) per cubic yard lean concrete mix as defined in the CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 206.02, may be used as bedding where a combination of ease of placement, low permeability, and unconfined stability is desired. Additional Requirements: -Bedding materials shall be free of topsoil, organic materials, frozen matter, debris, or other deleterious materials. -Flow-fill as specified by CDOT 1999 Standard Specifications, Section 206.02, may be used with District approval. -Ductile Iron Pipe may be required to be encased in loose polyethylene in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 installation methods, unless site soils and proposed bedding materials are determined to be non-corrosive to iron pipe when evaluated according to Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. -Materials not meeting these requirements shall be used only with prior written approval of the District. In specific areas, such as where access is extremely limited, the use of on-site materials may be allowed, and, when used, must be on-site 1½ inches minus well-graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written District approval. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the District. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready-Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. 2.06 TRACER WIRE Tracer wire shall be ten (10) gauge insulated copper wire and be required on all curve-linear applications. 2.07 MARKETING/LOCATING DISK The District will provide 3M “Green” marking disks to the contractor. The contractor shall ensure their correct installation. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.08 NON-DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE The installation of “green” marking tape is required on all sewer mains and service lines. The tape shall be installed approximately two feet (2’) above the main or line. The tape shall meet the following specifications: 1. 4-mil thick PVC material 2. Solid green color with black lettering 3. Six inches (6”) in width 2.09 CASING SPACERS Carrier pipes to be installed inside casings shall be installed with self-restraining casing spacers. Casing spacers shall provide axial thrust restraint to prevent pipe joint separation during and after installation. They shall also provide dielectric insulation between the carrier pipe and the casing and facilitate installation of the carrier pipe into the casing. Restrained casing spacers shall be provided at all pipe joints. In addition, casing spacers shall be installed every ten feet (10’) of the pipeline to support the pipe barrel and the weight of its contents. Restrained casing spacers shall be Uni-Flange Series UFRCS1300 or URFCS1390, or an approved equal restrained joint device and Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Company, Model CCM casing spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24- hour notification to Engineer. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the District. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Pipe installation may be lamped daily by Engineer. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. C. Wyes and Risers for Service Connections: Angle upward so 1/8 bend connected to fitting will make service line invert equal to inside crown of sewer main. Where elevation of top of service is more than 12' below finished grade, install riser pipe as directed by Engineer. 3.06 WATER LINE CROSSING A. Normal Conditions: Whenever possible, lay water mains over sanitary sewers to provide vertical separation of at least 18" between invert of water main and crown of sewer. B. Unusual Conditions: If above separation cannot be met, use following: 1. Sewer passing over or less than 18" under water main. Install continuous watertight pressure pipe C900 PVC or Yelomine until the water and sewer pipe are separated by more than 10 feet horizontally and or more than 18 inches vertically, transition couplings to be HARCO or equivalent. 3.07 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole is set. Construct SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient quantity so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six, two-inch reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.09 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES Place true to line and grade in accordance with drawings, from main line to house service, in shortest direct route. Locate 10' from all water lines. Terminate 5' from lowest corner of lot or as shown on drawings. Where wyes have not been installed in main sewer, tap by machine drilling hole in main, sized to fit saddle for service line. Each wye or drilled tap and saddle shall be inspected prior to backfilling. Service line minimum grade of 1/4" per foot. If service line is to be stopped at property line, place 6-foot steel fence post at end, extending 2' above finished ground. Place watertight plug in end of service line. 3.10 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.11 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use bedding material for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1’ above top of pipe for entire trench SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. 3.12 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 100% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2% of optimum moisture. 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3. Trenches in landscape areas: Compact to 95% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. 3.13 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct infiltration or exfiltration test for each section between manholes. Test first section of pipe laid to verify if watertight. Testing may be required during course of work where infiltration appears to be grater than maximum allowable, or quality of work is questionable. No sewer line will be accepted where water tightness tests show leakage exceeding 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day. Flush and clean sewer line prior to testing, wetting pipe, and cleaning out debris. Plug all pipe outlets to resist test pressure. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 8 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Infiltration Test: In high ground water table installation only. Plug upper manhole to determine leakage in section of line between consecutive manholes. Record quantity of water collected in time period to calculate infiltration rate. 3. Exfiltration Test by Air: Test each section of pipe between consecutive manholes to determine test duration for section by computation from Air Test Tables. Pressure-holding time is based on an average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge or a drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi gauge. Add air until internal air pressure of sewer line is raised to approximately 4.0 psi gauge. After internal pressure of approximately 4.0 psi is obtained, allow time for air pressure to stabilize. Pressure will normally show some drop until temperature of air in test section stabilizes. When pressure has stabilized and is at or above starting test pressure of 3.5 psi gauge, commence test. Before starting test, pressure may be allowed to drop to 3.5 psi. Record drop in pressure for test period. If pressure has dropped more than 1.0 psi gauge during test line has failed. Test may be discontinued when prescribed test time has been completed even though 1.0 psi drop has not occurred. ASTM C828 "Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers". Pipe Size Time Inches Minutes 4 2-1/2 6 4 8 5 10 6-1/2 12 7-1/2 15 9-1/2 18 12 21 14 24 15-1/2 3.15 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, is required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waster material off site. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 9 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 10 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02580 - ELECTRIC, COMMUNICATION CONDUITS, AND GAS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Excavation, rock excavation, blasting, rock disposal, dewatering, backfill, bedding, compaction, installation of conduits, vaults, pads and all necessary appurtenances and coordination with the telephone, cable television, electric and gas companies. B. Related Work: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definitions: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force 35,000 lbs each, and requiring drilling and blasting. D. Utility Company Specifications: All work shall conform to the standard specifications of the telephone company, the cable television company, the electric company and the gas company. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for pipe, fittings, and vaults; or certifications that products conform with specifications. B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. C. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat, falls below 35 degrees F, and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F at time of placing. ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 2"-8", Schedule 40 PVC. Electric rated for electric application. B. Electric primary conduit supplied by Holy Cross Energy. C. Gas pipe to be supplied and placed by gas company. 2.02 VAULTS All switchgear, transformer, splice vaults, pads, and bases to be supplied by Holy Cross Energy. 2.03 BEDDING A. Granular material - 3/4" screened rock. B. On-site 1-1/2" minus well graded screened material, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other suitable materials. Use of on-site bedding material must have prior written approval of the utility company and Engineer. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. General: All materials furnished from sources agreed to by the Utility Companies. B. Cement: ASTM C-150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate - 43% Water - 5.5 gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate - 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5% - 7% B. Job-Mixed Concrete Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than ten (10) minutes after all materials are in drum. ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Ready Mixed Concrete Proportioned, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general, blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Owner, Engineer and Fire Department. D. Trench Support: The trench shall be adequately supported and the safety of workers provided for as required by the most recent standards adopted by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards Board. Sheeting and shoring shall be utilized where required to prevent any excessive widening or sloughing of the trench, which may be detrimental to human safety, to the pipe and appurtenances being installed, to existing utilities, to existing structures, or to any other existing facility or item. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM AND EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. 3.03 BEDDING Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 3" below bottom of pipe to centerline for entire width of trench. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Water seeping from trench banks, but not flowing in trench bottom: Install gravel underdrain in accordance with drawings. B. Water flowing in trench bottom: Install underdrain pipe in addition to gravel where water volume will fill a 4" pipe 1/4 full. Cleanouts at each manhole in conformance with drawings. ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Daylight all underdrains as shown on drawings or as directed by Engineer. 3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Construct pipe accurately to line and grade shown on drawings. Remove and replace pipe not conforming to line and grade at Contractor's expense. B. Install to manufacturer's recommendations, continuously upgrade. Bell ends face upgrade. Prior to making joints, clean and dry all surfaces. Use lubricants in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for insertion of pipe in joint. Set pipe in position and check line and grade. Keep dirt from entering all exposed pipe ends. Joints watertight. 3.06 PADS AND VAULTS Install pads and vaults to line and grade shown on drawings. 3.07 PULL STRING Pull string shall be labeled to identify which utility company or spare conduit the use of the conduit is intended for. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible in order to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, and flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs exposed by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" screened rock or on-site screened material (if approved by Engineer) for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean soil, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris, or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to above top of pipe for entire trench width. Place in lifts to a density of 90% AASHTO T99. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. Carefully lower rocks up to 12" in diameter into trench. ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. B. Compaction requirements for all trenches: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procedures are applicable: Compacted uniformly throughout each lift to 100% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils the moisture content shall be 0 to +2% optimum. 2. Predominately of rock 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements, or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before pipe is to be tested. B. Testing 1. General: Conduct testing in accordance with procedures approved by the appropriate utility company or as directed by engineer. 3.13 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste material in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site, is required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste material off site. ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02580 ELECTRIC AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 02580 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Excavation, backfill, bedding, and installation of pipe, manholes, catch basins, inlets, outlets, underdrains, irrigation ditches, channelization, detention storage, siphons and all necessary appurtenances. B. Related Work: 1. Site clearing: Section 02230 2. Topsoil: Section 02922 C. Definition: 1. Trench Excavation: Excavation of all material encountered along trench other than rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: All solid rock formations which cannot be reasonably broken by a backhoe with 3/4 cubic yard bucket with bucket curling force and stick crowd force of 35,000 lbs. each, and requiring drilling and blasting. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings or product data showing specific dimensions and construction materials for: 1. Precast Manholes 2. Precast Catch Basins 3. Frames, Grates, Covers B. Test Reports: Submit laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, and compression test. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Except by specific written authorization, cease concreting when descending air temperature in shade and away from artificial heat falls below 35 degrees F. and there is frost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather, temperature of mix shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at time of placing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14 B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, circular; ASTM 506, arch; ASTM 507, vertical or horizontal elliptical. Class pipe as shown on drawings. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Concrete End Section: Same ASTM specification as pipe. Equivalent in area as circular pipe. D. Corrugated Steel Pipe and Arches: AASHTO M36, gauge as shown on drawings. Bands shall conform to following: Pipe Size Corrugations Number Bolts Inches 2-2/3" x 1/2" 3" x 1" 6-30 7" - 2 ea 36-60 12" 14" 3 ea 66-120 24" 20" 5 ea Thickness of band one gauge less than pipe but not less than 16 gauge. E. Corrugated Steel Pipe End Section: Sizes and dimensions shown on drawings. Materials same as corrugated steel pipe. F. Bituminous Coating: Where required on corrugated steel pipe and fittings, AASHTO M190, Type A, with minimum thickness of 0.03". Coupling bands fully coated. G. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D 3034. Blue Brute, AWWA C907 PVC, AWWA C900, AWWA C905. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): SDR 35; 4"-15", ASTM D3034 & ASTM F679 in accordance with ASTM D1784. Push-on joints and molded rubber gaskets. Maximum pipe length 20'. 2.02 UNDERDRAIN PIPE A. Corrugated Steel: AASHTO M36 Type III. Holes 3/8" double row each side of pipe for 6"-10" size pipe. Triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. Spaced in center of each depressed corrugation nearest to center pipe. Install hole row each side of pipe for 6"- 10" pipe; triple row each side of pipe for 12"-21" pipe. B. Rigid PVC Schedule 40. C. Flexible Polypropelene or Polyethylene/Hancor. 2.03 PREFABRICATED INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Corrugated Steel Units: Conform to drawing dimensions, AASHTO M36. Bituminous coating when specified, AASHTO M190, Type A. Steps fabricated into units. B. Precast Concrete Units: In accordance with drawings, ASTM C478 and C789, wall "B", wall thickness 1/12 internal diameter. Steps precast into units. 2.04 MANHOLE A. Manhole Bases: Precast concrete. Manhole base and first barrier section cast monolithic per ASTM - C478. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM C478. Precast concrete with minimum wall thickness 1/12 of internal diameter. Cones eccentric. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. Manhole Ring and Cover: Cast iron, ASTM A48. Ring and cover combined weight greater than 400 lbs., machined to fit securely. Non-rocking cover. Hot dipped in asphalt. D. Manhole Steps: Two non-skid grooves in the surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1,000 lbs. 6" from face of manhole. E. Manhole Joint Sealant: RubberNek. 2.05 SLOTTED DRAIN AASHTO M36 with grate assembly, ASTM A123. Joint and couplers of ring compression type. Where required, expanded wire mesh attached across top of drain opening. Fittings provided with annular ends for hugger-type bands. 2.06 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS, AND STEP Metal units conform to drain dimensions and to following for designated material. A. Gray Iron Castings: AASHTO M105. B. Carbon-Steel Castings: AASHTO M103. C. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536. D. Structural Steel: AASHTO M183 and ASTM A283, Grade B. Galvanizing, where specified, AASHTO M111. 2.07 BEDDING A. Pipe and culvert - roadbase, percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 3/4", 100; No.4, 30-65; No. 8, 25-55; No. 200, 3-12. B. Underdrain - washed gravel: percent by weight passing square mesh sieves: 1", 100%; 3/4", 95-100%; No.4, 0-5%. 2.08 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials furnished from sources approved by Engineer. B. Cement: ASTM C150 for Portland Cement, Type II. Cement which has become partially set or contains lumps, caked cement and have been exposed to inclement weather shall be rejected. C. Aggregate: ASTM C33. D. Water: Water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil, acids, salt, alkali, or organic materials harmful to concrete. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.09 CONCRETE MIX A. Design Mix: 1. Proportions: Cement 5-1/2 sacks per cubic yard Coarse aggregate 43% Water 5.5 Gallons per sack Maximum size aggregate 3/4" 2. Slump: 4" maximum 3. Strength: Minimum 3,000 psi at 28 days 4. Air Content: 5%-7% B. Job Mixed Concrete: Mixed in drum mixer conforming to Concrete Paving Mixer Standards of Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of Associated General Contractors of America. Mixer shall be capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Discharge entire contents of drum before recharging. Continue mixing of each batch for not less than 10 minutes after all materials are in drum. C. Ready Mixed Concrete: Proportioned, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Any concrete not plastic and workable when it reaches project shall be rejected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Trench Excavation: Excavate to depths required. Confine excavation to work limits. B. Rock Excavation: Prior to removal, notify Engineer of areas requiring rock excavation. C. Blasting: In general blasting will be allowed in order to expedite the work if a permit by the local authority having jurisdiction is granted. All explosives and appurtenances shall be transported, handled, stored and used in accordance with the laws of the local, state and federal governments, as applicable. All blasting shall be controlled so as not to injure any existing structure or facility. The protection of life and property and all liability for blasting shall be placed solely on the person or persons conducting the blasting operation. The hours of blasting shall be in accordance with the permit of the local authority. Prior to blasting, provide minimum 24 hour notification to Engineer. 3.02 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM, EXCAVATION IN POOR SOIL If the bottom of the excavation at subgrade is found to be soft or unstable or to include ashes, cinders, refuse, vegetable or other organic material, or large pieces or fragments of inorganic material that cannot satisfactorily support the pipe or structure, then the Contractor shall further excavate and remove such unsuitable material. Before the pipe or structure is installed, the subgrade shall be accepted by the Engineer. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.03 BEDDING OTHER THAN UNDERDRAINS A. Pipe: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 4" below bottom of pipe to centerline for full width of trench. B. Culvert: Install in conformance with drawings. Place from minimum of 6" below bottom of pipe to centerline of pipe for entire width of trench. 3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: For new embankments, place fill so width each side of pipe is at least five (5) times pipe diameter. After embankment is placed, proceed with trenching. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduit and outside circumferential laps of flexible conduit facing upstream. Place flexible conduits with longitudinal laps or seams at sides. B. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Remove all loose excavated materials from bottom of trench and install bedding to required thickness. Install pipe true to line and grade. Install remaining bedding material along sides of pipe to avoid any voids. Repair bituminous coating damage using similar coating material. Lubricate coupler bands. Vertical elongation caused by backfill operation shall not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. Compact backfill to 90% AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over top of pipe. C. Concrete Pipe: Extend bedding around bell where bell and spigot pipe is used. Place pipe on bedding as shown on drawings. Place remaining bedding along pipe sides with no voids. Compact backfill to 95% AASHTO T99 and continue to 1' over pipe. D. Underdrain Pipe: 1. General: Install to lines and grades shown on drawings. Extend underdrain material a minimum of 6" over top of pipe. Cover underdrain material for entire width of trench with filter fabric. If shown on drawings, line trench with fabric before installing pipe and underdrain material. 2. Concrete Pipe: Install with bell resting on trench bottom facing up grade, with underdrain material supporting pipe. 3. Corrugated Steel or PVC Pipe: Holes or perforations placed down with maximum 1" underdrain material under pipe. Joint according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SLOTTED DRAIN INSTALLATION Install in accordance with drawings. Trench as narrow as possible and backfill to create uniform foundation side support. Install true to line and grade. 3.06 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. Manhole: Construct in accordance with drawings. Extend concrete manhole base at least 8" below pipe barrel. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2" above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert after manhole is set. Construct side branches with as large radius of curvature as possible to connect to main invert. Inverts shall be smooth and clean with no obstructions, allowing insertion of expandable plug in pipe. Place complete and continuous roll of joint sealant on base ring in sufficient STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 quantity, so there will be no spaces allowing infiltration. Join each succeeding manhole section in similar manner. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. Turn eccentric cone and steps away from roadway ditch. B. Manhole Ring and Cover: Install at grade of finished surface. Where surface will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone so maximum of six - two inch thick reinforced concrete rings will adjust ring and cover to final grade. 3.07 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE Make connections to existing manholes, where no pipe is stubbed out, in similar manner as new manhole. Break small opening in existing manhole as necessary to insert new pipe and attain watertight seal. Chip existing concrete bench inside manhole to provide enough thickness for mortar bed to make new smooth continuous invert. Place expandable waterstop around portion of sewer pipe inserted into existing manhole. Use expandable grout to completely fill hole in manhole to create watertight repair. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK A. Placement: Place to required depth and width conforming to drawings. Place concrete as uniformly as possible to minimize amount of additional spreading. Place and consolidate with suitable tools to avoid formations of voids, honeycomb, or pockets. Well vibrated and tamped against forms. B. Retempering: Do not retemper concrete or mortar which has partially hardened by remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water. Provide concrete in such quantity as is required for immediate use. C. Curing: Protect against loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, rain, or flowing water, for not less than two days from placement of concrete. Immediately after finishing, cover concrete surface with curing medium which is applicable to local conditions as approved by Engineer. Protect exposed edge of concrete slabs by removing forms immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment. 3.09 BACKFILL A. One Foot Over Pipe: Use 3/4" road base for cover material and backfill by approved mechanical methods. Cover material shall be clean, free from organic materials, chunks of soil, frozen material, debris or other unsuitable materials. Place and compact starting at top of pipe bedding extending upwards to 1' above top of pipe. Place in lifts to a density of 95% AASHTO T99, at a point 6" above top of pipe. B. Remainder of Trench: Backfill with same materials excavated from work limits unless unsuitable. No rocks over 6" in diameter in top 12" of trench. No backfill material with rocks larger than 12" in diameter. 3.10 COMPACTION A. Demonstrate method of compaction. Engineer will test compacted demonstration section for uniform density throughout depth of each lift. Alter construction methods until providing one acceptable to Engineer. Continue same procedure until significant change in soils occurs, or required compaction is not being achieved, then demonstrate new method. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Compaction requirements for all trenches within limits of pavement, shoulders, or back of curbs: 1. Predominantly of cohesive soils where AASHTO T99 procures are applicable: Compact uniformly throughout each lift to 100% AASHTO T99. Moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. For clay soils moisture content shall be 0 to +2% of optimum. 2. Predominantly of rock, to 12" in diameter: Place in loose lifts up to average rock dimension. Placing of occasional boulders of sizes larger than maximum layer thickness may be agreed to by Engineer, provided material is carefully placed and large stones well distributed with voids completely filled with smaller stones, earth, sand, or gravel. Level and smooth each layer to distribute soils and finer fragments of earth. Wet each loose layer as necessary to facilitate compaction prior to placing additional lifts. 3.11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. General: Cast-in-place concrete conforming to dimensions shown on the drawings and accurate to tolerances of 1/4". Install forms so all finished lines will be true and straight. Install reinforcing steel with the spacing between the forms and between bars as shown on drawings. Keep excavation dry during construction. Compaction requirements same as above. B. Inlets and Outlets: Either cast-in-place or precast units, in accordance with drawings. When required, set castings accurately to grade with adjustment courses of brick in full mortar beds. Construct pipe inverts or smooth concrete inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe, with bench to stand on. C. Frames, Grates, Covers, and Steps: Install accurately according to drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure firm foundation. D. Trash Guards: Install in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Score existing surface with cutting wheel to create clean break line. Remove and dispose of existing surface and aggregate base course. Leave 6" undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. After trench has been backfilled and properly compacted, place aggregate base course in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact aggregate base course to 95% AASHTO T180 moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum. Replace pavement in accordance with permit requirements or minimum thickness in these specifications. Compact asphalt to 95% ASTM D1559; consolidate concrete with vibrators. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of pipe being laid in any trench. Cover no pipes until observed by Engineer. STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.14 CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Restore all pavements, curbs, gutters, utilities, fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began, and to satisfaction of Engineer. Deposit all waste materials in designated waste areas. Grade and shape disposal site. Complete topsoil and reseeding of site if required. Where disposal sites are not designated, remove and dispose of all waste materials off site. END OF SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 8 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02720 - UNBOUND BASE COURSE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade after utility contractors have completed installation of all utilities and furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Earthwork: Section 02300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Sieve analysis - ASTM C136 2. Wear Abrasion - ASTM C131 3. Liquid Limit - AASHTO T89, T90 4. Moisture Density Curves - AASHTO T99 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation: Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves Size Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 4" 100 - - - 3" 95-100 - - - 2" - 100 - - 1-1/2" - 90-100 - - 1" - - 100 - 3/4" - 50-90 - 100 No. 4 - 30-50 30-70 30-65 No. 8 - - - 25-55 No. 200 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12 Liquid limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6. Plasticity Index not exceeding 6. B. Requirements for this Project: Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project. UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02720 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Staking: Contractor will provide at his expense all additional staking necessary to ensure work conforms with drawings. B. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95% AASHTO T99. 3.02 MIXING The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogeneous mixture. 3.03 PLACEMENT If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6", construct in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6". When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8" upon approval of Engineer. 3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION Compact each layer to 95% AASHTO T180. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum. END OF SECTION 02720 UNBOUND BASE COURSE 02720 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02740 - FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Owner will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design mix formula. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials. B. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing laboratory: 1. Aggregate - AASHTO T96, CP-45, AASHTO T304, AASHTO T176, AASHTO T89, AASHTO T90 2. PG Graded Binders, use PG 58 - 28 - AASHTO T48, TP48, TP5 AND T51 3. Liquid Asphalt - AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026 4. Emulsified Asphalt - AASHTO M140 or M208 5. Compaction – Colorado Procedure 51, CP44 or CP81 C. Job Mix Formula: The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer. 1. A proposed job – mix gradation as required by the contract, which shall be wholly within the Master Range Table of Table 703 – 3 of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (CDOT Specifications) before the tolerances shown in Table 401 – 1, of the CDOT Specifications, are applied. The job – mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size. A single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved release agent. Petroleum distillates such as kerosene or fuel oil will not be permitted. Each truck shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material to protect the mixture from the weather. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Bituminous plant mix shall be placed only on properly constructed surfaces that are free from water, snow, or ice. The bituminous mixtures shall be placed in accordance with the temperature limitations of Table 401-3 “of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction” and only when weather conditions permit the pavement to be properly placed and finished, as determined by the Engineer. B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required. Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed. C. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications prior to placement of asphaltic concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96. Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Grading SX 1-1/2" - 1" - 3/4" 100 1/2" 90-100 3/8" - #4 - #8 28-58 #30 - #200 2-10 Sizes #8 and larger, tolerances + 8%; #30 + 6%; #200 + 3%; where 100% passing, no tolerance. Use Grading SX for this project. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT A. Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M226, Table 2. B. Superpave Performance Graded Binders shall conform to AASHTO Provisional Standard MP1 for PG 58-28 Performance Graded Binders 2.03 TACK COAT One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier: A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140 B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208 2.05 MIX DESIGN A. Use Grading SX, 75 Design Gyrations, PG 58-28 Binder. 1. Job – Mix Formula as defined in the Submittal Section (02740 – 3, Part 1.03 C). B. Furnish aggregate gradation. C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications. 2.06 MIXING A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant equipment and operation. B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%. Deliver dry aggregate to mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workability of mixture. C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit temperature - viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F. D. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic cement to achieve 95% minimum coated particles for base mixtures in accordance with AASHTO T195 and 85-90% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in accordance with ASTM D2489. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section. Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers, blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust. B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with levelling courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surfacing at 0.1 gallon per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do not extend more than 2000' ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling on tack coat. 3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on emergency basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing. 3.03 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Place at temperatures of not less than 275 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self-powered pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade, and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control may be used for levelling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screed shall be adjustable for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required. Screed shall strike off mix without tearing, shaving or gouging surface, to depth and cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Paver shall be capable of placing courses in thicknesses from 1/2" to 4" and from widths of 8' to 15'. Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6". B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free from hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin, uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be 1/4" above all structures and gutters sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving. C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances of these specifications. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day's work, to insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt, dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture, density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new asphaltic concrete. 2. Prepare longitudinal joints by overlapping screed 1" on existing surface. Deposit sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake 1/2" on new mat leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately 1" high. Compact against joint by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8" for width of 6", after final compaction. E. Finish Tolerance: Place levelling courses within 1/2" of design grade. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 1/4". Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner. F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings. Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: Provide one pneumatic-tired and one steel-wheel roller to obtain required density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place. B. Rollers 1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent mix from sticking. 2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under each tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish one complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines. C. Compaction Procedures 1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperature must not be below 185 degrees F. 2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface. 3. Final rolling by a combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density, surface texture, and surface tolerances required. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado Procedure 51. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. 3.05 PATCHING Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact and finish to specification. 3.06 CLEAN UP After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area. END OF SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02740 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02750 - RIGID PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnishing, forming, jointing, placing and curing of concrete pavement, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, pans, in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Unbound Base Course: Section 02720 C. Concrete Paving Joints: Section 02751 D. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 E. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 02753 F. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 02754 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress. B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement, temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to Engineer. C. Installers: 1. All work in this section to be accomplished under direct on-site supervision of thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work and the recommendations contained in the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding the following certificate: ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT) or other Flatwork Finisher certification program approved by CDOT. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one certified Craftsman is required for each three or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs) at each operation 2. In acceptance of the finished work, allowance will not be made for lack of skill on the part of the workers. D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly adhered to concerning both methods and materials. Where surrounding conditions or base materials are not compatible with manufacturer’s recommendations, notify Engineer in writing prior to bidding. E. Design Criteria: See Part 2 Products RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 F. Testing Agency: All testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory and paid by the Owner with the exception of Contractor submittal requirements, qualifications of proposed materials and establishment of mixture proportions and other tests required by the Contractor to assure Contractor is furnishing materials and construction in compliance with the contract documents. G. Source Quality Control: The Engineer or his representative shall be offered uninterrupted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. H. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer for examination at any time. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcement, precast sections. B. Manufacturers Data: Additives, joint materials, curing compounds, concrete sealant with 10-year manufacturer warranty, fly ash, reinforcement, concrete bonding agent, precast concrete reinforcing supports. C. Mix Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content, admixtures, fly ash. A laboratory trial mix shall be prepared and test results submitted. The Concrete Mix Design will not be approved when the laboratory trial mix data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past or aggregate data are the results from tests performed more than two years in the past. Provide all of the information outlined below for the concrete mix proposed for the project: Identification: 1. Project. 2. Name and address of Contractor and concrete producer. 3. Mixture designation. 4. Class of concrete and intended use. Materials and Proportions: 1. Name and location of material sources for aggregate, cement, admixtures and water. 2. Type of cement and additives (if used). 3. Cement content in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. 4. The water/cement ratio of modified concrete is the ratio of the mass of water to the combined masses of Portland cement and supplementary cementitious material. 5. The saturated surface dry batch mass for the coarse and fine aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. 6. Water content (including free moisture in the aggregate plus water in the drum, exclusive of absorbed moisture in the aggregate) in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard) of concrete. 7. Target water/cementitious ratio. 8. Dosage of admixture(s). Entrained air may be obtained either by the use of an air-entraining Portland cement or by the use of an air-entraining admixture. 9. Sieve analysis of aggregates. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 10. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate. 11. Bulk specific gravity (dry and saturated surface dry) of fine and coarse aggregate. 12. Dry rodded unit mass of coarse aggregate in kilograms per cubic meter (pounds per cubic yard). 13. Fineness modulus (FM) of fine aggregate. 14. Concrete unit mass. 15. Material certifications for Portland cement, admixtures, and aggregate. The laboratory trial mix shall include results of the following: 1. AASHTO T119 slump of hydraulic cement concrete. 2. AASHTO T121 weight per cubic foot, yield, and air content (gravimetric) of concrete. Air content from AASHTO T152 air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method may be used in lieu of the air content by the gravimetric method in AASHTO T121. 3. AASHTO T22 compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens shall be performed with at least two specimens at 7 days, two at 14 days and three specimens at 28 days. 4. Report compressive strength at other times as necessary for expected opening to traffic requirements. D. Placement: Method proposed. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. When air temperature is above 85°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Excessive slump or delivery time will be considered as a basis for rejection of the concrete placement. B. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required before depositing concrete, the General Contractors Superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement: a. When placing concrete in cold weather, as defined in Section 02753, follow specifications for Cold Weather Concreting, Section 02753. b. When placing concrete in cold weather that does not meet the definition of “cold weather” in Section 02753, the following requirements shall be observed: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at minimum of 50°F for not less than 72 hours after depositing. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2. Maintain forms in place for minimum of 72 hours after depositing concrete. 3. Do not place concrete without acceptance of Engineer on days when temperature 9:00 A.M. is below 40°F until, the General Contractor has taken all necessary precautions and supplied all necessary equipment to prevent concrete from freezing. 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow specifications for Hot Weather Concreting, Section 02754. B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry walls, glazing and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring slabs, sidewalks, or other concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 READY-MIXED CONCRETE AASHTO M157 2.02 CEMENT Portland Cement ASTM C 150, TYPE I/II. 2.03 CONCRETE Use CDOT Concrete Class P 2.04 AGGREGATES A. Fine Aggregate - AASHTO M 6. 1. Fineness Modulus (FM) – AASHTO T 176, 2.50 < FM < 3.50 B. Coarse Aggregate - AASHTO M80. Coarse Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Class P concrete. For curb and gutter, curbs, sidewalks, pads and pans use AASHTO M43 coarse aggregate gradation #67. 2.05 WATER - AASHTO T26 A. The maximum slump of the delivered concrete shall be the slump of the approved concrete mix design plus 1-1/2”. B. Water cement ratio - 0.44 maximum 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Agent - AASHTO M154. See table for percent air requirements. Nominal Maximum Size Target Entrained Air Content aggregate, in. at the point of delivery, percent* 3/8 7-1/2 1/2 7 3/4 6 1 6 RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1-1/2 5-1/2 2 5 * tolerance, -1% to +2% B. Chemical-Admixtures AASHTO M194 2.07 QUALITY A. Provide approved mix design B. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301 C. Field cylinders shall produce 28-day minimum compressive strength of 4200 psi. Cement content 660 lb/cy minimum. 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and plain billet-steel bars AASHTO M31 B. Fabricated steel bar rod mats, steel wire fabric AASHTO M54 2.09 JOINT MATERIAL AASHTO M173 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Burlap cloth from jute or kenaf - AASHTO M182 B. Liquid membrane - AASHTO M148, 1 gal/150 SF C. Sheet Materials - AASHTO M171, 4 mil 2.11 SEALANTS A. Euclid Baracade Silane 100 High Performance Water Repellent or Symons Silane 40% 2.12 WATER: CLEAN AND POTABLE 2.13 FLY ASH: A. ASTM C 618. Use Class F fly ash only. The amount of fly ash shall conform to the percentages allowed in CDOT Class P concrete. Fly ash shall be from a source listed on CDOT’s Approved Products List (APL). Verification from the supplier shall be submitted, confirming the fly ash is currently on CDOT’s APL. 2.14 DOWEL BARS AND TIE BARS: A. Dowel bars for transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 254 for the coating and to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for the core material and shall be epoxy coated, smooth and lightly greased for their full length. Dowel bar sizes and placement RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. B. Tie bars for longitudinal and transverse joints shall conform to AASHTO M 284 and shall be grade 40, epoxy coated, deformed steel bars. Tie bar sizes and placement shall be as designated in the current CDOT M&S Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. When tie bars are required between concrete pavement and adjacent curb and gutter, the gutter thickness shall be increased to match the pavement thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE/BASE COURSE A. Check for soft spots by proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove soft yielding material and replace. Compact to specification. Wet to optimum moisture to 6" deep, not more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will not absorb moisture from concrete. B. Test for crown and/or elevation to assure specified thickness. If additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elevation, compact to specification. Before placing concrete, clean subgrade of all loose materials. No disturbance inside forms after fine grading subgrade. 3.02 INLETS, MANHOLES AND SIMILAR STRUCTURES CAST IN PAVEMENT: Thicken pavement and install joints and bond breaker at inlets, manholes and similar structures according to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Smaller structures such as valve and monument boxes do not require a bond breaker. 3.03 FORMS A. Capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment, with maximum deflection of 1/4". Straight and free from warp, with maximum surface deviation of 1/8". In good condition, clean, and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when placed. Joined neatly and accurately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure firm placement. Oil prior to concrete placement. B. Set dowels if required and expansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement. Lightly grease dowels full length. C. Backfill behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT When indicated, place wire mesh as shown on drawings. If required for this project, place dowels and tie bars in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. Hold all tie and marginal bars in proper position by sufficient supports or pins. If center longitudinal joint sawed in lieu of placing metal or plastic strip, bars may be mechanically installed or placed on supports. Where rebar, rod mats or steel wire mesh is RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 required, support with bar chairs. Where two layers of mesh are required, support bottom layer by bar chairs with separators for top mesh. 3.05 READY-MIXED CONCRETE The use of ready-mixed concrete shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proportion, mix, delivery, or placement of concrete. All ready-mixed concrete shall comply with ASTM C94. Concrete shall be continuously mixed or agitated from the time the water is added until the time of use. The concrete shall be deposited in place within 90 minutes after batching when concrete is delivered in truck mixers or agitating trucks. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating truck may be extended to 120 minutes if: (1) no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placements is less than 90° F. The 90 minute time limit for mixer or agitating trucks may be extended to 180 minutes if (1) no water is added after 90 minutes (2) the concrete temperature prior to placement is less than 90°F (3) the approved concrete mix contains a water reducing and retarding admixture which conforms to AASHTO M194, Type D. In accordance with ASTM C94, water may be added to ready-mix concrete one time in order to get slump within range, as long as the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Engineer shall have free access to the ready mix plant at all times. The organization supplying the concrete shall have sufficient plant and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery of the concrete at the required rate. The contractor shall collect delivery or batch tickets from the driver for all concrete used on the project and shall deliver them to the Engineer. Batch tickets shall provide the following information in accordance with ASTM C94: A. Name of ready-mix batch plant B. Serial number of ticket C. Date D. Truck number E. Name of purchaser F. Specific designation of job (name and location) G. Mix # or specific class or designation of the concrete H. Amount of concrete in cubic yards I. Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates J. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials K. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates L. Type, brand and amount of cement M. Type, brand and amount of admixtures N. Weight (in gallons) of water, including surface water on aggregates 3.05 PLACEMENT Deposit near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without damage to subgrade. Operate transit mixer outside forms at all times, except in locations agreed to by Engineer. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in manner requiring as little rehandling as possible. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation of materials. Additional spreading may be by hand shovels. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike off screed for full length of screed. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms, so final surfaces will not have holes or honeycombs. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.06 FINISHING A. Use equipment designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float freshly placed concrete in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogenous mixture, requiring minimum of hand finishing to meet surface tolerances. Strike hand finished surfaces to tolerances by methods agreed to by Engineer. B. Finished surfaces will be tested with 10' straight edge parallel to centerline immediately following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5' and space under straight edge shall not exceed 3/16". C. Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging. Curbs, gutters, pans, and sidewalks shall be broom finished unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Broom finish unless otherwise indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. E. ACI certificated finisher(s) must be on-site during finishing. F. The contractor shall not add water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations. 3.07 CURING (see Section 02752 Concrete Paving Curing for detailed specifications) Apply curing compounds or sheets immediately after finishing. Do not mark or mar finished surface. Coat sides within one hour after form removal. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Have plastic sheeting or other suitable materials available at all times to protect fresh uncured surfaces from rain. B. Provide full protection from freezing. Admixtures (calcium chloride) are not acceptable for freeze protection. C. For hot weather, use fog spray or water retarding additives. Do not throw water directly on surface. D. When indicated, apply two (2) coats deep penetrating sealant. E. Conform to ACI 102.2R-09 “Guide to Durable Concrete” 3.09 JOINTS (see Section 02751 Concrete Paving Joints for detailed specifications) A. Contraction joints. For concrete pavement and concrete pans, depth 1/3 the thickness of concrete. For sidewalks, depth 1/4 the thickness of concrete. For curb and gutter, depth 1/4 the thickness of the gutter concrete. If curb and gutter is poured monolithically with concrete pavement, transverse joints shall be to the same depth as the pavement. 1. Hand formed with tool, header board, or trowel pushed into surface to move all aggregate from joint. 2. Saw joints as soon as concrete can support equipment without marring and cutting can proceed without chipping, spalling or tearing, no later than 12 RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 8 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 hours after placement. Saw as soon as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking and prior to the development of shrinkage cracking. Transverse joints to be perpendicular to centerline. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart, intermediate joints sawed after initial joints. Suitable guidelines shall be provided to ensure joint is straight and true to line. 3. Curb and gutter, sidewalk and pan joints shall have tooled radii per current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details.. 4. Longitudinal joints, including tie bars if required, shall conform with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. 5. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place. B. Construction joints shall conform to the current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details and, if required, tie bars shall be installed. Transverse construction joints shall be planned to coincide with a contraction joint location. 1. Joints constructed by forms with tie bars. C. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical position, deviating not more than 1/4" from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed structures projecting through, into, or against pavement, in accordance with current CDOT M Standards unless indicated on the plans and details. D. Install joint sealant in all joints, at temperatures above 50 degrees F., in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris and water from joint. 3.10 THICKNESS Remove and replace work less than 95% of thickness according to drawings at Contractor's expense. 3.11 CLEANUP After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and clean work area. 3.12 OPENING TO TRAFFIC Pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed and the concrete has achieved a flexural strength of 650 psi. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: All testing, with the exception of slump tests, shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. The following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at the discretion of the Engineers. B. Testing Laboratory: The selection of a testing laboratory for any of the following tests shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. Testing Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine the concrete quality throughout the project, however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 9 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 D. Slump Tests: Provide all necessary equipment and make tests in conformity with ASTM C143 at a minimum frequency as indicted by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Provide for tests to be made by a person thoroughly familiar with the requirements specified. Reject batch if slump excess the limits specified. Keep accurate record of time, location in the work, and the results of all slump tests. Make available for inspection by the Engineer. E. Control Tests: Control tests of concrete work, as a minimum, shall be made at such times and in such manner as indicated by CDOT specifications, with additional testing as needed or as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. For this project, each test shall consist of 5 standard 6” test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. Compressive strength samples shall be obtained at a minimum frequency of one sampling per day and more if deemed necessary by materials testing organization. Two cylinders shall be broken at the end of 7 days after placing and three cylinders shall be broken 28 days after placing. The Engineer reserves the right to stop all future concrete work when the 7 or 28-day tests indicate unsatisfactory results; until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to assure quality concrete in future work. Tests shall be made at the time test cylinders are taken, and recorded on the reports to determine the slump, air content, unit weight, and temperature of the concrete. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C39, ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. F. Maturity metering: When maturity metering is required, each pour shall include the necessary wires and connectors for maturity meter monitoring. 3.14 PROTECTION General: Protect all exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping and other damage during progress of work, and leave in good condition upon completion. END OF SECTION 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT 02750 - 10 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02751 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Work of this section generally includes provisions for joints for concrete paving; concrete sidewalks; curbs, and curb and gutter; and saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavements for new joints. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE General and Supplemental Conditions and all of Division One Sections govern and are hereby made a part of the work of this Section. A. Earthwork: Section 02300 B. Concrete Paving Curing: Section 02752 C. Flexible Pavement: Section 02740 D. Rigid Pavement: Section 2750 E. Cold Weather Concreting: Section 02753 F. Hot Weather Concreting: Section 02754 1.03 MEASUREMENT A. No measurement will be made for street pavement load transfer expansion joints. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. B. No measurement will be made for saw-cutting existing concrete or asphalt pavement for new joints or existing concrete curbs. Include cost in unit price for concrete paving. C. No measurement will be made for formed or sawed street pavement contraction joints; longitudinal weakened plane joints and non-load transfer expansion joints regardless of material. Include cost in unit price for Concrete Paving. D. No measurement will be made for joint for Curb, Curb and Gutter; Concrete Sidewalks; and Concrete Driveways. Include cost in unit price for Curb and Gutter; Concrete Sidewalks; and Concrete Driveways. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet – Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ASTM D994 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 C. ASTM D1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D3405 – Standard Specification for Joint Sealant, Hot-Poured, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals. B. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. C. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Board Expansion Joint Material: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear, all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear, all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. B. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous composition material conforming to ASTM D994 and ASTM D1751. C. Joint Sealing Compound: Silicon based mastic, color to match paving, conforming to ASTM 3405. D. Load Transmission Devices: 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. When indicated on Drawings, encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. E. Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B. If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 1 –1/2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No. 6 deformed tie-bars, 30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place ¾ inch expansion joints at radius points of curb returns for cross street intersections, or as located in adjacent pavement but no further than 60 feet apart. Use not boards shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of board. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape board filler accurately to cross-section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Drawings. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.04 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Drawings. Place smoothed, painted and oiled dowels accurately and normal to joint. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. The spacing of joints shall result in approximately square panels and spaced as follows: Slab Thickness ¾” Aggregate inches max spacing, ft 5 10 6 12 7 14 These joints to be perpendicular to centerline. Align curb and gutter joints with street rjoints. 3.05 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS A. Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Drawings. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.06 SAWED JOINTS A. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of ½ inch wide. Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus ½ inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence in concrete placement. B. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.07 JOINTS FOR CURB, CURB AND GUTTER A. Place ¾ inch expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 100 foot centers. 3.08 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Provide ¾ inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM A1751 along and across sidewalks at back of curbs, at intersections with driveway, steps, walls and across walk at intervals not to exceed 36 feet. Provide expansion joint material conforming to ASTM D994 for small radius curves and around fire hydrants and utility poles. Extend the expansion joint material full depth of the slab. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F and less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C. Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be ¼ inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.10 PROTECTION A. Maintain joints in good condition until completion of work. B. Replace damaged joints material with new materials as required by this Section. CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02751 CONCRETE PAVING JOINTS 02751 - 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLOARDO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02752 - CONCRETE PAVING CURING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes curing of Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE General and Supplemental Conditions and all of Division One Sections govern and are hereby made a part of the work of this section. A. Earthwork – Section 02300 B. Rigid Pavement – Section 02750 C. Concrete Paving Curing – Section 02752 D. Cold Weather Concreting – Section 02753 E. Hot Weather Concreting – Section 02754 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C171 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. B. ASTM C309 – Standard Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300-Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer’s product data for cover materials and liquid membrane-forming compounds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A. Curing materials shall conform to one of the following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of ASTM C171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than ¾ of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLOARDO DECEMBER 20, 2013 2.02 LIQUID MEMBRANE – FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 Kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01.1 GENERAL A. Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B. Where curing requires use of water, curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.02 POLYETHELENE FILM CURING A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or by replacing. 3.03 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B. Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.04 COTTON MAT CURING A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B. Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLOARDO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.05 LIQUID MEMBRANE – FORMING COMPOUNDS A. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752 - 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLOARDO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02752 CONCRETE PAVING CURING 02752 - 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02753 - ACI 306.1-90 - COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 1 - GENERAL 1.1 - Scope 1.1.1 This Standard Specification covers requirements for cold weather concreting and protection of concrete from freezing during the specified protection period. 1.1.2 The provision of this Standard Specification shall govern unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 1.2. - Definitions These definitions are to assist in interpreting the provisions of this specification. Accepted - Accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer. Engineer -The engineer or engineering firm issuing Project Drawings and Specifications, or administering the Work under the Contract Documents. Cold weather - A period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 F. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When temperatures above 50 F occur during more than half of any 24 hr duration, the period shall no longer be regarded as cold weather. Cold weather concreting - Operations concerning the placing, finishing, curing, and protection of concrete during cold weather. Contractor - The person, firm, or corporation with whom the Owner enters into an agreement for construction of the Work. Contract documents - Documents including the Project Drawings and Project Specifications covering the required Work. Day - A time period of 24 consecutive hours. Owner - The corporation, association, partnership, individual, or public body or authority with whom the Contractor enters into an agreement and for whom the Work is provided. Project drawings -The drawings, which along with the Project Specifications, complete the descriptive information for constructing the Work required or referred to in the Contract Documents. Project specifications - The written documents which specify requirements for a project in accordance with the service parameters and other specific criteria established by the Owner. Protection period - The required time during which the concrete is maintained at or above a specific temperature in order to prevent freezing of the concrete or to ensure the necessary strength development for structural safety. Reference standards - Standards of a technical society, organization, or association, including the codes of local or state authorities, which are referenced in the Contract Documents. Required - Required by this Specification or the Contract Documents. Submitted - Submitted to the Engineer for review. Work - The entire construction or separately identifiable parts thereof which are required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02753- 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 1.3 - Reference organizations ACI: American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 1.4 - Reference standards 1.4.1 ACI Standards 301-89 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 1.4.2 ASTM Standards C 31-88 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 150-86 Standard Specification for Portland Cement C 494-86 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C 803-82 Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete C 873-85 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast in Place in Cylindrical Molds C 900-87 Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete 1.5 - Submittal of procedures 1.5.1 Detailed procedures - If required, submit detailed procedures for the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. In the submittal, include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and accepted. Minimum procedures for placement, curing and protection of the concrete shall follow the recommendations in ACI 306R, “Cold Weather Concreting.” The details should include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Procedures for protecting the subgrade from frost and the accumulation of ice or snow on reinforcement or forms prior to placement. b. Methods for temperature protection during placement. c. Types of covering, insulation, housing, or heating to be provided. d. Curing methods to be used during and following the protection period. e. Use of strength accelerating admixtures. f. Methods for verification of in-place strength. g. Procedures for measuring and recording concrete temperatures. h. Procedures for preventing drying during dry, windy conditions. 2 - - MATERIALS 2.1 Scheduling protection materials All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project site before cold weather concreting. 2.2 - Concrete Concrete for slabs and other flatwork exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing in a wet condition during the construction period shall be air entrained. COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02753- 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 - Preparation before concreting Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, completely thaw the subgrade. Do not place concrete around massive embedments identified in the Contract Documents unless such embedments are at a temperature above freezing. 3.2 - Concrete temperature 3.2.1 Placement temperature - The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. The temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1 by more than 20F. Table 3.2.1 - Concrete temperature (1) (2) (3) Least dimension of Minimum temperature Maximum gradual section, in. of concrete as placed decrease in surface and maintained during temperature during protection period, °F any 24 h after end of protection, °F Less than 12 55 50 12 to less than 36 50 40 36 to 72 45 30 Greater than 72 40 20 3.2.2 Protection temperature - Unless otherwise specified, the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection period shall be as shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. Temperatures specified to be maintained during the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface, whether the surface is in contact with formwork, insulation, or air. Measure the temperature with a surface temperature measuring device having an accuracy of +/-2 F. Measure and record the temperature of concrete in each placement at regular time intervals at a frequency not less than twice per 24-hr period. 3.2.3 Termination of protection - The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a 24-hour period shall not exceed the values shown in Column 3 of Table 3.2.1. Do not exceed these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperatures. When the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F of the ambient or surrounding temperature, all protection may be removed. 3.3 - Curing of concrete Prevent concrete from drying during the required curing period. If water curing is used, terminate use at least 24 hr before any anticipated exposure of the concrete to freezing temperatures. 3.4 - Protection of concrete 3.4.1 Combustion heaters - Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to the outside of the enclosure. 3.4.2 Overheating and drying - Place and direct heaters and ducts to avoid areas of overheating or drying of the concrete surface. 3.4.3 Maximum air temperature - During the protection period, do not expose the concrete surface to air having a temperature more than 20 F above the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless higher values are required by an accepted curing method. COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02753- 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 3.4.4 Protection against freezing - Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3 days, unless otherwise specified. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance with Column 2 of Table 3.2.1, unless otherwise specified. The protection period may be reduced to 2 days if use of one or more of the following to alter the concrete mixture is accepted: • Type III portland cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 • A strength accelerating admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C 494 • 100 lb/yd³ of additional cement During periods not defined as cold weather, but when freezing temperatures may occur, protect concrete surfaces against freezing for the first 24 hr after placing. Any changes in the concrete mix proportions for reducing the duration of the protection period to prevent early freezing should be submitted for review or acceptance. 3.4.5 Protection deficiency - If the temperature requirements during the specified protection period are not met but the concrete was prevented from freezing, continue protection until twice the deficiency of protection in degree-hours is made up. Deficient degree hours may be determined by multiplying the average deficiency in temperature by the number of hours the temperature was below the values shown in Column 2 of Table 3.2.1. APPENDIX - METRIC CONVERSIONS Inch-pound unit Factor S1 unit In. x25.4 = mm Lb/yd3 x0.5933 =kg/m1 Psi x0.006895 =Mpa Temperature, °F (°F-32)/1.8 =°C Temperature interval °F °F/1.8 =°C END OF SECTION 02753 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING 02753- 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02754 - ACI 305.1-06 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING SECTION 1—GENERAL 1.1—Scope This Specification covers requirements for hot weather concrete construction. Provisions of this Specification shall govern, except where other provisions are specified in Contract Documents. This Specification shall not be used in conjunction with ACI 301 or ACI 530.1. 1.2—Referenced standards 1.2.1 Standards of ACI and ASTM referred to in this Specification are listed with serial designation, including year of adoption or revision, and are part of this Specification. 1.2.2 ACI Standards 308.1-98 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete 1.2.3 ASTM Standards C 31/C31 M-03a Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field C 39/C 39M-05 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens C 78-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading) C 94/C 94M-05 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete C 138/C 138M-01a Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete C 143/C 143M-05a Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete C 171-03 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C 173/C 173M- 01ε1 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method C 192/C 192M-05 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory C 231-04 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method C 293-02 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading) C 1064/C 1064M-05 Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 1.2.4 Abbreviations for and complete names and addresses of organizations issuing documents referred to in this Specification are listed: American Concrete Institute (ACI) PO Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094 Phone: (248) 848-3700 Fax: (248) 848-3701 website: www.concrete.org HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASTM International (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Dr West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Phone: (610) 832-9500 Fax: (610) 832-9555 website: www.astm.org 1.3—Definitions day—a period of 24 consecutive hours. evaporation retardant—a material that generates a continuous thin film when spread over water on the surface of fresh concrete and thus retards the evaporation of bleed water. hot weather—job-site conditions that accelerate the rate of moisture loss or rate of cement hydration of freshly mixed concrete, including an ambient temperature of 27 °C (80 °F) or higher, and an evaporation rate that exceeds 1 kg/m2/h, or as revised by the Engineer. hot weather concreting—operations concerning the preparation, production, delivery, placement, finishing, protection, and curing of concrete during hot weather. moist—slightly damp but not quite dry to the touch; “wet” implies visible free water, “damp” implies less wetness than “wet,” and “moist” implies not quite dry. protection period—the required time during which the concrete is protected against thermal cracking due to rapid temperature drops. temperature of fresh concrete—the temperature measured during the discharge and placement in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. temperature of hardened concrete—the temperature measured at the concrete surface. units—values stated in either U.S. Customary or SI units shall be regarded separately as standard. Values stated in each system might not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system must be used independently of the other, without combining values in any way. 1.4—Submittal of procedures 1.4.1 Before hot weather concreting and the preplacement conference, submit to Engineer for review and comment detailed procedures, including production, placement, finishing, curing and protection of concrete during hot weather concreting. 1.5—Preplacement conference 1.5.1 At least 15 days before the start of the concrete construction schedule, hold a preplacement conference for the purpose of reviewing hot weather concreting requirements and mix designs. 1.5.2 Send a preplacement conference agenda on hot weather operations and procedures to representatives of concerned parties not less than 10 days before the scheduled date of the conference. 1.5.3 Preplacement conference shall include, but is not limited to, representation of Contractor, Concrete Subcontractor, Testing Agency, Pumping Contractor, and Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer. 1.5.4 Distribute the minutes of the preplacement conference to representatives of concerned parties within 5 days after the preplacement conference. 1.6—Documents required on site 1.6.1 Copies of ACI 305R, ACI 305.1, and ACI 308.1 must be available at the project site during concrete construction. HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 2—PRODUCTS 2.1—General 2.1.1 Store all materials and equipment required for curing and protection at or near the project site before hot weather concreting commences. 2.1.2 Initial site curing of strength test specimens for acceptance—Provide facilities that ensure compliance with the initial curing requirements of ASTM C 31/C 31M. 2.2—Concrete mixture proportions 2.2.1 Submit concrete mixture proportions to Engineer for review. Include specific materials, manufacturer, and type for hot weather concreting. The submittal shall include concrete mixture adjustment parameters and methods to be implemented during changes in weather conditions. SECTION 3—EXECUTION 3.1—General 3.1.1 Do not place concrete against surfaces of absorbent materials that are dry. Do not place concrete against surfaces that have free water. 3.1.2 Prepare all materials required for accepted evaporation control measures and have them available on site so that specified measures can be executed as necessary. 3.1.3 Initiate accepted evaporation control measures when concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity of the air, and the wind velocity have the capacity to evaporate water from a free water surface at a rate that is equal to or greater than 1.0 kg/m2/h (0.2 lb/ft2/h), unless otherwise specified. Determine the evaporation rate of surface moisture by use of the Menzel Formula: W = 0.315(eo – ea)(0.253 + 0.060V) [SI units] W = 0.44(eo – ea)(0.253 + 0.096V) [U.S. Customary units] where W = mass of water evaporated in kg (lb) per m2 (ft2) of water-covered surface per hour; eo = saturation water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air immediately over the evaporating surface, at the temperature of the evaporating surface. Obtain this value from Table 3.1(a) or (b). The temperature of the evaporating surface shall be taken as the concrete temperature; ea = water vapor pressure in kPa (psi) in the air surrounding the concrete. Multiply the saturation vapor pressure at the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete by the relative humidity of the air. Air temperature and relative humidity are to be measured at a level approximately 1.2 to 1.8 m (4 to 6 ft) above the evaporating surface on the windward side and shielded from the sun’s rays; and V = average wind speed in km/h (mph), measured at 0.5 m (20 in.) above the evaporating surface. 3.1.3.1 Monitor site conditions (air temperature, humidity, wind speed) to assess the need for evaporation control measures beginning no later than 1 hour before the start of concrete placing operations. Continue to monitor site conditions at intervals of 30 minutes or less until specified curing procedures have been applied. 3.1.3.2 For measuring the rate of evaporation of surface moisture, use equipment or instruments that are certified by the manufacturer as accurate to within 1 °C (2 °F), 5% relative humidity, and 1.6 km/h (1 mph) wind speed. Use equipment in accordance with the product manufacturer recommendations. HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 3 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Table 3.1(a)—Saturation water vapor pressure (kPa) over water (SI units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °C pressure, kPa temperature, °C pressure, kPa 4 0813 28 3.78 5 0.872 29 4.01 6 0.934 30 4.24 7 1.00 31 4.49 8 1.07 32 4.75 9 1.15 33 5.03 10 1.23 34 5.32 11 1.31 35 5.62 12 1.40 36 5.94 13 1.50 37 6.28 14 1.60 38 6.63 15 1.70 39 6.99 16 1.82 40 7.38 17 1.94 41 7.78 18 2.06 42 8.20 19 2.20 43 8.64 20 2.34 44 9.10 21 2.49 45 9.58 22 2.64 46 10.1 23 2.81 47 10.6 24 2.98 48 11.2 25 3.17 49 11.7 26 3.36 50 12.3 27 3.56 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into kPa. Table 3.1(b)—Saturation water vapor pressure (psi) over water (U.S. Customary units) Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °F pressure, psi temperature, °F pressure, psi 40 0.121 81 0.523 41 0.127 82 0.542 42 0.132 83 0.559 43 0.137 84 0.577 44 0.143 85 0.595 45 0.147 86 0.615 46 0.153 87 0.637 47 0.159 88 0.658 48 0.166 89 0.679 49 0.171 90 0.698 50 0.178 91 0.722 51 0.185 92 0.746 52 0.192 93 0.769 53 0.199 94 0.789 54 0.206 95 0.816 55 0.214 96 0.843 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 4 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 Air and concrete Saturation Air and concrete Saturation temperature, °F pressure, psi temperature, °F pressure, psi 56 0.222 97 0.870 57 0.231 98 0.896 58 0.238 99 0.920 59 0.247 100 0.951 60 0.257 101 0.981 61 0.267 102 1.01 62 0.277 103 1.04 63 0.285 104 1.07 64 0.296 105 1.10 65 0.308 106 1.13 66 0.319 107 1.17 67 0.327 108 1.20 68 0.339 109 1.24 69 0.352 110 1.27 70 0.366 111 1.31 71 0.378 112 1.35 72 0.388 113 1.39 73 0.403 114 1.43 74 0.418 115 1.47 75 0.433 116 1.52 76 0.443 117 1.56 77 0.459 118 1.60 78 0.476 119 1.65 79 0.494 120 1.70 80 0.510 Data source: CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 68th Edition, 1987, mathematically converted into °F and psi. 3.2—Maximum allowable concrete temperature 3.2.1 Limit the maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature to 35 °C (95 °F), unless otherwise specified, or unless a higher allowable temperature is accepted by Engineer, based upon past field experience or preconstruction testing using a concrete mixture similar to one known to have been successfully used at a higher concrete temperature. 3.2.2 Measure the fresh concrete temperature at the point and time of discharge in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Frequency of temperature determination shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M and at the option of the inspector. 3.3—Qualification of concrete mixture proportions 3.3.1 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by past field experience of Section 3.2.1, shall be based, on similar climate and production conditions, materials, mixture proportions and temperatures, placing and finishing methods, and concrete delivery time. 3.3.2 Approval of concrete mixture and proposed maximum allowable fresh concrete temperature, supported by preconstruction testing of Section 3.2.1, shall require materials similar to those proposed for use in the project. 3.3.3 Laboratory trial batch—Batch the laboratory concrete trial mixture within 2 °C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature and mix in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, except as modified herein. If necessary, move the laboratory mixer into an enclosed, heated and ventilated space, or use heated mixing water, or both, to achieve and maintain the proposed HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 5 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 maximum allowable concrete temperature. For drum-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 47 minutes after completion of the 3-minute initial mixing period unless specified otherwise. During the 50-minute period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss, and rotate the mixer continuously at an agitation speed of 6 to 8 rpm. For laboratory mixers without speed adjustments, simulate agitation by rotating the mixer continuously at a drum angle between 45 and 75 degrees from horizontal. At the end of 50 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. For pan-type mixers, the concrete mixture shall remain in the mixer for 41 minutes after completion of the initial 3-minute mixing period. During the 44-minute period, the mixer shall cycle through periods of rest for 5 minutes, and then mixing for 1 minute. During the rest period, cover the mixer opening with a non-absorbent material, such as plastic, to prevent moisture loss. At the end of 44 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (8 to 20 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods for both drum-type and pan-type mixers, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both, to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 50- or 44-minute laboratory trial mixing period. 3.3.3.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall meet the specified slump range at the end of the laboratory mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.4 Field trial batch—Batch the field concrete trial mixture within 2 °C (3 °F) of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature in a truck-mixer with a minimum batch size of 3 m3 (4 yd3). If necessary, move the truck mixer into an enclosed, heated, and ventilated space to achieve a concrete temperature within the specified tolerance of the proposed maximum allowable concrete temperature. The concrete mixture shall be held in the mixer for 90 minutes, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. During the entire 90-minute period, agitate the mixer at 1 to 6 rpm. At the end of 90 minutes, mix the concrete mixture at full mixing speed designated by the manufacturer (6 to 18 rpm) for 2 minutes. During mixing and agitation periods, the addition of water, chemical admixture, or both, to adjust slump is permitted provided that the specified concrete mixture w/cm is not exceeded. As needed, check and adjust the slump of the concrete mixture during the middle 1/3 of the 90-minute mixing period. 3.3.4.1 The proposed concrete mixture shall be within the specified slump range at the end of the 90-minute field mixing period and meet the required strength at the specified test age. 3.3.5 Test values obtained in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard shall include compressive strength (C 192/ C 192M or C 31/C 31M, and C 39/C 39M), flexural strength (C 192/C 192M and either C 78 or C 293; C 31/C 31M and either C 78 or C 293), or both; slump (C 143/C 143M); air content (C 231, C 173/C 173M, or C 138/C 138M); concrete density (unit weight) (C 138/ C 138M); and concrete temperature (C 1064/ C 1064M). Slump, air content, and concrete and air temperature measurements shall be performed after initial mixing, intermediately as needed or as desired, and at the conclusion of the mixing period along with the other specified tests. 3.3.6 Acceptance of concrete mixture proportions— Submit to the Engineer for acceptance a request for a specific higher maximum allowable concrete temperature. Include the constituent materials and proportions of the proposed concrete mixture and all values obtained from past field experience or preconstruction testing. Test results shall be within the Project Specification ranges and tolerances. 3.4—Concrete production and delivery 3.4.1 Concrete shall be produced at a temperature such that its maximum temperature at discharge will not exceed the specified maximum allowable concrete temperature. Acceptable production methods to reduce the temperature of the concrete include: shading aggregate stockpiles, sprinkling water on coarse aggregate stockpiles; using chilled water for concrete production; substituting chipped or shaved iced for portions of the mixing water; and cooling concrete materials using liquid nitrogen. The submittals for hot weather concreting shall indicate which methods will be used and in HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 6 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 what order they will be initiated when multiple methods are to be used. The substitution of other cooling methods will be considered by the Engineer when requested in the submittal and accompanied by satisfactory supporting data. 3.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M, which requires the concrete to be discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the truck-mixer drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first. 3.5—Concrete placement and finishing 3.5.1 Concrete placement and finishing operations shall proceed as quickly as conditions will permit. 3.6—Concrete bleed-water evaporation 3.6.1 Control concrete surface bleed-water evaporation with application of evaporation reducers, plastic sheeting, fog spray, or wind breaks. Use these materials and methods in accordance with ACI 308.1 Submit for approval the desired method to be used when concreting during periods with evaporation rates higher than permitted 3.7—Concrete curing 3.7.1 Concrete curing—Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. 3.8—Concrete protection 3.8.1 Protection period—Protect the concrete against thermal shrinkage cracking due to rapid drops in concrete temperature greater than 22 °C (40 °F) during the first 24 hours unless otherwise specified. 3.8.2 Protection materials—Acceptable protection materials to prevent excessive temperature drops are insulating blankets, batt insulation with moisture-proof covering, layers of dry porous material such as straw, hay, or multiple layers of impervious paper meeting ASTM C 171. These protection materials shall not be applied until the concrete surface temperature has become steady or is beginning to decline. HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 7 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02754 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING 02754- 8 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SECTION 02760 - PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Layout and paint lines and direction arrows, signs, handicapped designations, etc. at: a. Parking garage slabs b. Asphaltic and concrete vehicular paving 2. Paint curbs as indicated- if applicable B. Related Sections: 1. Asphalt Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Paving 2. Parking Garage Slabs: Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Cement Paving: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in pavement marking with proper equipment for pavement marking project of this size. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking in wet weather or when temperature is below 40 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRIPING PAINT A. Paint: Solvent base paint complying with Colorado State Highway Department Specifications. 1. Color: White or yellow as directed by Architect and Civil Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MARKING A. Preparation and Layout: 1. After paving is fully cured, sweep paving clean. 2. Layout: Layout and paint symbols, direction arrows, signs, etc., on asphalt paving, concrete paving and parking garage slabs as indicated on Drawings. 3. Verify marking layouts with Architect before proceeding. PAVEMENT MARKING 02760 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 B. Markings: 1. Lines: Four inches wide painted by mechanical striping machine. 2. Markings: Apply lining and other markings sufficient quantity to produce completely opaque lines and markings. END OF SECTION 02760 PAVEMENT MARKING 02760 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 1 DHM Design Denver, CO SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate setting bed. 2. Edge restraints for unit pavers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork". 2. Division 7 Section "Composite Sheet Waterproofing. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants 4. Division 15 Section “Snowmelt” 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Concrete pavers. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 2 DHM Design Denver, CO A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build a 7’x7’ mockup for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials. 1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping. B. Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or re- moval by wind. The covering shall be secured in place. C. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 3 DHM Design Denver, CO B. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete Pavers: a. 2-3/8” City Stone II Random Mosaic pavers, Size: 3”x6”, 6”x6”, 6”x9” b. 2-3/8” City Stone II pavers for running bond pattern, Size: 6”x9” c. Pavers shall be provided by Pavestone, Denver. Contact: John Rowe, 303- 287-3700. 2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Colors and Textures: 1. Random Mosaic: a. Color: Winter Blend b. Texture: standard 2. Running Bond: a. Color: Antique Pewter b. Texture: standard 2.3 UNIT PAVERS A. Pedestrian Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated. 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accord- ance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. 4. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. 5. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. 6. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 4 DHM Design Denver, CO 2.4 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection. 2.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Owner or his author- ized representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936 82 for sampling of mate- rial prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested in compli- ance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) specimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimen- sional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test required for an average value. Testing of full units is preferred. 2.6 REJECTION A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufac- turer may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owner from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.7 EXPENSE OF TESTS A. The expense of inspection and testing shall be borne by the Owner. 2.8.1 ACCESSORIES A. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.9 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: ASTM D 2940, subbase material. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 5 DHM Design Denver, CO B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. C. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10. D. Sand for Joints: RG Polymeric Sand for Pavement Joints; in color indicated. 1. Manufacturer: Techni-Seal: www.techniseal.com. 2. Product Type: Dry mix, contains polymeric binding agent, activated with water. 3. Joint Sand Colors: Tan PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 6 DHM Design Denver, CO 1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. D. Joint Pattern: As indicated. E. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving. 1. Provide joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces; or, if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until paver installation is complete. F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. G. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. I. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers. 1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." J. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent pavers. 1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed. 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS -ON GRADE A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density. B. Place geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). C. Place aggregate base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated. Compact base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 7 DHM Design Denver, CO D. Place geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. F. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches (1200 mm) on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain. I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. K. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. END OF SECTION 02780 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-1 DHM Design Denver, CO SECTION 02815 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with landscape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials, refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, backflow preventer assemblies, valves, fittings, heads, controllers and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Tests. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-2 DHM Design Denver, CO Project, and financial stability, submit if requested by Consultant, prior to contract award the following: 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. c. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget. B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.5 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract. A. Materials List - Submit six copies of a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction. B. Record Drawings (As-Builts): 1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation design from Owner. At the end of every day, revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built field prints shall be brought up- STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-3 DHM Design Denver, CO to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built drawings. Indicate non- pressure piping changes on as-built. Upon completion of Project, but prior to scheduling of substantial acceptance walk-through, submit for review a final set of as-built mylars and an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing). c. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves. f. Drip line blow-out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire and communication cable splices j. Water meters k. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of sleeve l. Flow sensors m. Pressure regulating valves 2. Owner’s Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated. C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. 1. Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as- built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller. c. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-4 DHM Design Denver, CO irrigation system. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle that allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.7 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-5 DHM Design Denver, CO 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. 1.8 WARRANTY/GUARANTY - Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property. B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. One eight foot valve key for operation of stop and waste valve. 2. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. 3. Two keys for each automatic controller. 4. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-6 DHM Design Denver, CO notification by Owner. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK - In addition to installed system furnish the following items to Owner: A. 10 Pop-up spray heads with nozzles of each type used. B. 4 Rotor heads of each type used. C. 30 Drip emitters of each type used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention unit) - Type "k" Hard Copper (3/4” – 2 1/2”) and ductile iron (3” and larger). 2. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 PVC BE (1" - 2 1/2") and Type "k" Hard Copper (3/4” – 2 1/2” where suspended over structure). 3. Non-pressure Lines – 100 PSI, NSF Polyethylene 4. PVC Sleeving - Class 160 PVC. 5. Drip Tubing - Toro Dura-Pol EHD 1645 3/4" with .050 inch wall thickness. 6. Emitter Tubing - As recommended by emitter manufacturer. B. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. 2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and solidus at 1125~F and liquids at 1145~F. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class. D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-7 DHM Design Denver, CO 2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1. a. Fittings - Standard Wright, Schedule 40, injection molder PVC; complying with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454- B. 1) Threads - Injection molded type (where required). 2) Tees and ells - Side gated. b. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. c. Teflon Tape – All PVC male threaded fittings and nipples, excluding marlex fittings, shall receive wrapping of Teflon tape applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. d. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings. 3. Flexible Plastic Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D2239, with a hydrostatic design stress of 630 psi and designated as PE 2306. a. Fittings – Insert type manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609; PVC Type 1 cell classification 12454-B. b. Clamps - All stainless steel worm gear screw clamps. Use 2 clamps per joint on 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch fittings. E. Drip and Sub-Surface Irrigation Systems: 1. Drip Tubing - Manufactured of flexible vinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 4, P14 and ASTM D3350 for PE 122111C. 2. Fittings - Type and diameter recommended by tubing manufacturer. 3. Drip Valve Assembly - Type and size shown on Drawings. a. Wye Strainer - Plastic construction with 150 mesh nylon screen and 1/2 inch blowout assembly. b. Control Valve - 2 way, solenoid pilot operated type made of synthetic, non-corrosive material; diaphragm activated and slow closing. Include freely pivoted seat seal; retained (mounted) without attachment to diaphragm. c. Pressure Reducing Valve - Plastic construction as detailed. 4. Emitters - Single port, pressure compensating, press on type. 5. Sub-Surface tubing - Size and type shown on Drawings; installed as detailed. F. Gate Valves: 1. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 Inch Pipe - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and non-rising stem with wheel operating handle. 2. Gate Valves for 3 Inch and Larger Pipe - Iron body, brass or bronze mounted AWWA gate valves with a clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter of valve; rubber gasket or mechanical joint-type only. Valves STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-8 DHM Design Denver, CO shall be able to withstand a continuous working pressure of 200 psi and be equipped with a square operating nut and resilient wedge. Provide pipe restraints on gate valves 3 inches or larger as detailed. G. Quick Coupling Valves - Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 150 PSI; operable with quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with locking rubber cover. H. Valve Boxes: 1. Gate Valves, Quick Coupling Valves, Drain Valves, Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire Splice or Stub Box - Carson Brooks #910-10, box as detailed. 2. 1 inch through 2 inch Control Valves, Master Valves, Pressure Regulating Valves and Communication Cable Splice box - Carson Brooks #1419-12 box as detailed. 3. Drip Valve Assemblies and Flow Sensors - Carson Brooks #1220-12 box as detailed. I. Electrical Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage: a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed. b. Electrical Common Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed. c. Wire Colors: 1) Control Wires - Red. 2) Common Wires - White. 3) Master Valve Wires - Blue. 4) Drawing Spare Control Wires - Black. 5) Drawing Spare Common Wires - Yellow. d. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Consultant. e. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBY direct bury splice. 2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to accommodate needs of equipment serviced. J. Automatic Controller - Size and type shown on Drawings; mounted as detailed. K. Electric Control Valves - Size and type shown on Drawings having manual flow adjustment and manual bleed nut. L. Sprinkler Heads - As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on Drawings - with fittings and nipples of equal diameter as riser inlet in sprinkler body. M. Backflow Preventer - Size and type indicated on Drawings; Brass or iron STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-9 DHM Design Denver, CO construction with 150 psi working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CONDITIONS, LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor’s expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that vary from the conditions shown on the Irrigation Construction Documents. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the change in field conditions. 3.2 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION - Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site, prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing, to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, design costs and plant replacement costs. 3.3 INSPECTION - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irrigation installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and approved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be prepared. Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-10 DHM Design Denver, CO coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. 2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by +/- 10% of the spacing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of variances exceeding 10%, Contractor assumes full responsibility for the costs associated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner. 3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Consultant has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping - 18 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving – To match depth of sleeved material. c. Non-pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. d. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. e. Control Wiring/Communication Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a separate trench with no mainline piping.. f. Drip Tubing - 12 inches from top of pipe. g. Emitter Tubing (Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 4. Vibratory Plow - Non-pressure piping may be installed through use of vibratory plow method if consultant determines soil conditions are satisfactory for this method of installation. Vibratory plowing does not relieve installer of minimum pipe depths. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-11 DHM Design Denver, CO D. Pressure Supply Piping Locating Tape for Non-Potable Systems: Markline Tape, 3" wide detectable tape, NP purple in color with the words "CAUTION: RECYCLED/ RECLAIMED WATERLINE BELOW" printed every 36 inches. Place 12" below finish grade. 3.5 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Consultant shall review deviations prior to installation. A. PVC/COPPER/POLY Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Flexible Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe - Lay pipe and assemble fittings following manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Copper pressure mainline and lateral lines that are suspended under structure shall be installed in accordance with the mechanical engineers recommendations. B. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when making penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all installed drip tubing. 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. C. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. c. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using 3M DBY connectors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-12 DHM Design Denver, CO g. Maintenance spare wires - In addition to spare wires labeled on drawings, extend two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one spare #14 AWG UFUL common wire from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label maintenance spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician. D. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as detailed and where shown on Drawings. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on Drawings. 3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fittings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade where shown on Drawings as detailed. When grouped together, allow minimum of 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install valve box flush with grade or when present flush with surfacing material (rock mulch). When parallel to roadway, sidewalk or other permanent element or structure, control valve and box to be installed perpendicular to element or structure, spaced equally. F. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing-joint assemblies as indicated on construction details; plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. G. Drip and Sub-Surface Valve Assemblies - Install valve assembly as detailed. H. Drip Emitters - Stake all surface emitters as detailed and staked with acceptable tubing stakes. Sub-Surface tubing - Size and type shown on Drawings; installed as detailed, per manufactures recommendations. I. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly downstream of backflow preventer as detailed. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve as detailed. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed as detailed. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for master valves and flow STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-13 DHM Design Denver, CO sensors. Install gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. K. Gate Valves - Install where shown on Drawings as detailed. L. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assemblies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or adjustments without additional cost to the Owner. M. Backflow Preventer - Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings. N. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Consultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk- through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is unacceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within 20’-0" of building or foundation walls. O. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-14 DHM Design Denver, CO 3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. P. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing. B. Pressure Testing - Conduct test in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. Compressed air shall not be used for pressure testing system. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. 6. Pressure test shall be scheduled and passed prior to scheduling of Substantial Completion Walk-through. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and additionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for observation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are performing and installed as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 IRRIGATION 02815-15 DHM Design Denver, CO separate walk-through if necessary. 7. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substantial completion walk-through. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant’s presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of Consultant. 5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system, Consultant finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. 3.7 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, fine-tune entire system by adjusting patterns and break-up pins, and setting pressure reducing valves at proper and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 10%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.8 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. END OF SECTION STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 1 DHM Design Denver, CO SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground covers. 4. Plants. 5. Lawns. 6. Fertilizers and mulches. 7. Stakes and guys. 8. Landscape edging. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" 2. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" 3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" 4. Division 2 Section "Soil Amendments" 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Delivery tickets for all bulk materials with Owner’s Representative’s approval or acknowledgment that materials were received in satisfactory condition. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products, where applicable. 2. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. 3. Label data and cut sheets substantiating that landscape materials, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 2 DHM Design Denver, CO including all soil amendments, herbicides, and pesticides, comply with specified requirements. D. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species, variety, percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for sod, identifying sod source, including name and telephone number of supplier. E. Samples of each of the following: 1. 1 cubic foot of mulch for each mulch type required for Project, in labeled plastic bags, boxes, or buckets. 2. Edging materials and accessories. 3. Weed barrier. 4. Soil amendments. 5. Staking and guying materials. 6. Erosion control materials. 7. Landscape boulders. 8. Planter mix. 9. All items requested by Contractor for Substitution or as an Approved Equal. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and address of architects, owners, and other information specified. G. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following materials with requirements indicated. 1. Analysis of existing surface soil for plant growth. 2. Analysis of imported topsoil for plant growth. 3. Analysis of well and non-potable water sources for watering plant material. H. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. I. Three (3) sets maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. J. Three (3) copies of a written warranty stating all items included in the warranty, conditions of the warranty, and beginning and ending of warranty period(s). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 3 DHM Design Denver, CO A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Landscape Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock", and all applicable state and local rules and regulations. D. Inspection: Landscape Architect may inspect plants either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, and quality. 1. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject at any time or place prior to final acceptance all plant materials which, in the Landscape Architect’s opinion fail, to meet specifications. Inspection of materials is primarily for quality, size, and variety, but other requirements are not waived even though visual inspection results in approval. Plants may be inspected where available; however, inspection at the places of supply shall not preclude the right of rejection at the site or at a later time prior to final acceptance. Rejected material shall be removed from the site within 24 hours. 2. The Contractor shall schedule inspection of the plants, at either the supplier or on site, to be completed in one visit. Any further inspection required due to plants being unavailable or rejected as not meeting specifications shall be charged to the Contractor at the current hourly rate for Landscape Architect’s personnel performing the inspection. E. Topsoil Analysis: The Contractor shall furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing agency stating percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant- nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil. F. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6-inches (150 mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12-inches (300 mm) above ground STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 4 DHM Design Denver, CO for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip. G. Pre-installation Conference: Contractor shall attend pre-installation conference at locations specified by Owner’s Representative. H. U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act: quality standards for Certified Seed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect containers before or after installation to verify compliance with Specifications. B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect containers before or after installation to verify compliance with Specifications. C. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod Producers Association's (ASPA) "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and Transplanting/Installing”. Protect sod from drying and breaking. D. Trees and Shrubs: Deliver nursery stocked or freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Plant materials delivered without protective covering may be rejected. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing a legible plant name. Remove all tags and flagging as directed by Landscape Architect. 1. Immediately after digging bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. E. Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball. F. Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for 2 hours if dried out. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5 DHM Design Denver, CO planting. 4. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. Contractor shall be responsible for utility locating, repair of utilities damaged by Contractor, and establishment of grade controls. B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Applies to all contract work areas which have vegetation or weed growth of 2-inch height or greater, and which are designated to be topsoiled, amended, seeded, sodded, and/or planted under this Contract. 1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. B. Seeding in areas that are unirrigated or not provided with sprinkling or watering systems shall be restricted according to the following schedule. 1. Above 8000' elevation: Seeding shall occur between spring thaw until consistent ground freeze. 2. Spring thaw shall be defined as the earliest date in a calendar year in which seed can be buried ½ inch into the topsoil thru normal drill seeding methods. 3. Consistent ground freeze shall be defined as that time during fall months in which the topsoil, due to freeze conditions, prevents burying seed ½ inch thru normal drill seeding operations C. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades have been accepted and prior to planting turf and native grasses, unless authorized by Owner’s Representative. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for a period of one (1) year after date of Final Acceptance, against defects including death and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 6 DHM Design Denver, CO unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground covers, vines, and perennials. 4. Seeded Areas. C. Replace planting materials that are excessively pruned, more than 25 percent dead, or in an unhealthy or declining condition immediately upon notice from the Owner’s Representative. D. All plants shall be true to name and meet all conditions of these specifications. Any plant which is not true to name as indicated by form, leaf, flower, or fruiting characteristics shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. E. Seeded areas shall be accepted on the basis of having uniform grass growth over all the seeded areas. Acceptable uniform grass growth shall be defined as when scattered bare spots, not greater than one square foot, do not exceed 5% of the seeded area. F. Inadequate or improper maintenance by the Owner shall not be cause for replacement, provided the Contractor shall have submitted a letter or report to the Owner on improper or inadequate maintenance practices and recommended remedial actions. G. The warranty shall not be enforced should any plant die due to vandalism after final acceptance. 1.8 TREE, SHRUB, GROUND COVER AND PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain trees, shrubs, ground covers and plants by pruning, cultivating, watering, winter watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings. Maintain trees and shrubs for the following period: 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months following Final Acceptance. 1.9 NATIVE GRASS AND WILDFLOWER MAINTENANCE A. Maintain native grass and wildflower seeded areas by regrading, reseeding, and mulching as required to insure erosion control and complete seed coverage. Begin maintenance of grasses immediately after each area is planted and continue maintenance for not less than the following periods: 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months following Final Acceptance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 7 DHM Design Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully-branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, girdling, and defects such as sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect with a proportionate increase in size of roots and balls. C. Label each plant with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. D. Label at least 1 plant each variety and caliper with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. E. All plants shall be the species designated on the Drawings. No substitutions will be accepted without the prior written approval of the Landscape Architect. Contractor must provide proof of non-availability. 2.2 TREES A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. 1. Branching Height: 1/3 to ½ of tree height. B. Small Trees: Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1, and stem form as designated on Drawings. C. Evergreen Trees: Specimen XXX quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1. D. Provide balled and burlapped trees. E. All deciduous trees of one species used in formal rows or groupings shall exhibit cultural uniformity, i.e. “matched” in height, crown width and shape, height to first branch, and trunk taper. For this reason it is desired that these trees be produced by a single grower. 2.3 SHRUBS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 8 DHM Design Denver, CO A. Form and Size: 1. Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. Root development shall be sufficient to hold soil in the shape of the container when removed, but without visible circling roots. 2. Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1. B. Provide container-grown shrubs. 1. Container-grown shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock. 2.4 GROUND COVERS, PERENNIALS, AND VINES A. Provide ground covers and plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than the minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size indicated. 2.5 GRASS MATERIAL A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. 1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity and germination as indicated: A. Native Grass Seed: Provide the following mixture. Grass Seed Variety Lbs.. P.L.S. /Acre Multi-Color High Altitude Mix Dryland Seeding Rate: 20-25 lbs/acre 30% Ephraim Crested Wheatgrass 20% Dwarf Perennial Ryegrass 20% SR3200 Blue Fescue 15% Reubens Canada Bluegrass 10% Chewings Fescue 5% Wildflower Mix Arkansas Valley Seed Solutions 4625 Colorado Boulevard Denver CO 80216 Ph: 877-957-3337 Fx: 303-320-7516 Email: bgueck@seedsolutions.com STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 9 DHM Design Denver, CO B. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth. Be responsible for furnishing water from underground sprinkler system, quick couplers or other source. C. Fertilizer: None required. D. Mulch: Shall meet the requirements of CDOT 213.02. E. Tackifier: Shall meet the requirements of CDOT 213.02. F. Erosion Control Blanket: Greenfix America 100% California Straw Erosion Control Blanket, supplied by Revex, Inc., 8941 Woodland Rd. Longmont, CO 80503, Ph: 1-800-666-4050, or approved equal. 2. Quantity of bulk seed required to provide the specified PLS shall be calculated from purity and germination percentage rates listed on the lot tag of seed actually purchased, using the following formulas: Purity % multiplied by Germination % = PLS % Lbs. PLS specified /1000SF = Bulk Lbs. req. /1000SF PLS % 2.6 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7.0, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 1-inch or larger in any dimension, refuse, plants or their roots, sticks, noxious weed seeds, salts, sterilants, or other material which would be detrimental to plant growth. Topsoil shall have salts of less than 2 mmhos/cm and a sodium absorption ratio of less than 12. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 2.7 ROOFTOP PLANTER MIX AND POTS A Topsoil Mix (S1): This is a mixture of specified sand and specified organic matter in a volume ratio of 7:3. to be used on the upper half of the planter soils 1. Sand: USDA loamy sand with a coefficient of uniformity (Cu) = 4.00 to 6.00. Sieve No. % Passing 8 100 10 90-100 18 65-70 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 10 DHM Design Denver, CO 35 35-40 60 15-20 140 5-10 300 2-5 2. Organic Matter: Biocomp, as supplied by A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 800-776-1684. a. pH of 6.5 to 7.5 b. soluble salts less than 500 ppm (EC < 7.8) and SAR (sodium adsorption ratio) < 7. c. 1-2% total nitrogen d. 0.5-1.5% phosphorus e. 0.2-1.5% potassium f. the compost must not contain any PCBs or Dioxins, and must meet EPA Type 1 organic waste material and STAND SPECS Type 2 organic amendment. g. must have 100% passing ½-inch or smaller screen. The resultant uncompacted dry bulk density of this mix is approximately 1.21 Mg/m3, or 75.5 lb/ft3. a. field capacity weight is approximately 84.9 lbs/cuft. at 15% moisture content B. Subsoil Mix (S2): This is a mixture of specified sand, organic matter and an inorganic amendment in a volume ratio of 7:2:1 to be used in the lower half of the planter soils. 1. Sand: USDA loamy sand with a coefficient of uniformity (Cu) = 2.86 Sieve No. % Passing 8 100 10 95-100 18 90-95 35 80-85 60 45-50 140 10-15 300 1-5 2. Organic Matter: Biocomp, as supplied by A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 800-776-1684. a. pH of 6.5 to 7.5 b. soluble salts less than 500 ppm (EC < 7.8) and SAR (sodium adsorption ratio) < 7. c. 1-2% total nitrogen d. 0.5-1.5% phosphorus e. 0.2-1.5% potassium f. the compost must not contain any PCBs or Dioxins, and must meet EPA Type 1 organic waste material and STAND SPECS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 11 DHM Design Denver, CO Type 2 organic amendment. g. must have 100% passing ½-inch or smaller screen. 3. Inorganic Amendment: A stable, noncrushable calcined diatomaceous earth: AXIS® AXT-2, manufactured by Eagle-Picher Industries, Reno, Nevada, (775) 824-7600. a. porosity of at least 74% b. pH of 7.0 c. apparent dry density of about 34 lb/ft2. d. pore size range of 0.1 to 1 micron e. bulk density of 0.51 g/cc f. cation-exchange capacity of 27 meq/100 g g. 2 mm in diameter The resultant uncompacted dry bulk density of this mix is approximately 1.25 Mg/m3, or 77.9 lb/ft3. a. field capacity weight is approximately 84.1 lb/ft3. at 10% moisture content. 2.8 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. Cost of fertilizer will be paid on a direct time and materials basis. B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water- insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency. Cost of fertilizer will be paid on a direct time and materials basis. 2.9 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Organic mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Shrub and Perennial Beds: Fir Fiber Mulch 4” in depth, as supplied by Direct Landscape Supply, Englewood, Colorado, 303-781-2270; Wes Moser & Sons, Inc., Ft. Lupton, Colorado, 303-659-9663; or an approved equal. No weed barrier. B. Fiber Mulch ( hydromulch): Biodegradable green dyed-wood cellulose-fiber mulch, nontoxic, free of plant growth- or germination-inhibitors, with maximum STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 12 DHM Design Denver, CO moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. F. Non-asphaltic Tackifier: Organic derivative vegetative gum tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application, nontoxic and free of plant growth- or germination-inhibitors. 2.10 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A. Non-woven Fabric: Spunbond Polyester fabric, 3.7 oz. per sq. yd., minimum permeability of 160 gal. per min. ft./2; Polyspun XL supplied by Direct Landscape Supply, Englewood, Colorado, 303-781-2270, or an approved equal. 2.11 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photo degradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6-inches (150-mm) long minimum. 2.12 STAKES AND GUYS A. Upright Stakes: Green 8-foot steel tee posts with bottom blade with white plastic end caps. B. Guy Stakes: 30-inch long steel tee posts with white plastic end caps C. Guy and Tie Wire: 12 gauge galvanized wire. All guy and tie wires shall be covered with 1-inch diameter PVC pipe, white. D. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turn buckles, 3-inch- (75-mm-) long minimum, with two 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) galvanized eye bolts. E. Tree Collar Strap: Minimum 2-inch wide non-stretch webbing with grommets for attachment of wire between strap and stake. F. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least ½-inch (13-mm) in diameter, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage. G. Evergreen trees that are 8-feet tall or taller shall have wire guys threaded through rubber hose sections which are looped around the tree trunk and secured to 30- inch long metal tee posts. Fabric tree collar strap will not be acceptable on evergreen trees taller than 8-feet. 2.13 LANDSCAPE EDGING A. Steel Edging: Ryerson steel edging, 4-inch depth, 3/16-inch thick, with line stakes and splicer stakes as recommended by manufacturer. Color: Green 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 13 DHM Design Denver, CO A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: Treflan as manufactured by Elanco Company, or an approved substitution. C. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4-inches (102-mm) wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent. F. Landscape Boulders: Select granite river boulders chosen for unique appearance and character. Boulder size, location, and number are representative only and may vary. Approve boulder type, size range, and number with Landscape Architect prior to delivery or installation. G. Herbicides and Pesticides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FINISH AND FINE GRADING A. Tillable Soil: Mechanically rip or disk subsoil in all areas to be planted to a minimum depth of 6-inches prior to placing top soil and soil amendments. B. Positive Surface Drainage: Finish and fine grade the project area to establish an even and well matched gradient over the entire surface. Provide positive surface drainage, with no depressions, settling, or irregularities in the finished grade. C. Transitional Areas: At any transitional point or line where one plane intersects another, such as from a sloping area or berm to a level area, a smooth and gentle transition shall be made. There shall be no abrupt changes in grade unless specifically noted otherwise. Match the grades of new work with existing areas outside the project area. 3.3 SOIL TESTING A. The Contractor shall perform soil tests 30 days prior to mobilizing for Landscape Construction. B. Soil testing shall be provided by Colorado Analytical Laboratory, 240 S. Main Street, Brighton, CO 80601, (303) 659-2313, or an approved testing facility. Soil STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 14 DHM Design Denver, CO shall be tested for soluble salts and nutrient levels. Testing facility shall provide interpretation of results and recommendation for soil amendments for each type of planting. C. Soil test shall be performed for all stockpiled topsoil. Provide a separate test for each 50 cubic yards of topsoil. D. Soil test shall be performed for all imported topsoil. Provide a separate test for each 50 cubic yards of topsoil. E. Deficient nutrients shall be corrected with the addition of appropriate fertilizer and amendment materials. The Contractor shall submit a Change Order Request for all additional materials that are recommended but are not included in this Specification. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make adjustments as directed. 3.5 WEED CONTROL A. In areas that have been regraded and/or have existing weed growth, weed control measures appropriate to the amount of growth and/or species shall be provided. Submit weed control plan to Owner’s Representative for approval. B. Clear and grub, apply pre-emergent herbicide, and/or apply post emergent herbicide as necessary to eliminate weeds. Do not proceed with Landscape work until weed growth has been controlled. 3.6 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, lumps, and other material harmful to plant growth and the appearance of a smooth finish grade. B. Spread topsoil evenly over entire project area to be planted, seeded, or sodded. 1. Spread a minimum of 4-inches of topsoil. C. Spread amendments and fertilizers at rates indicated: 1. Annual and Perennial Beds: Install Planter Mix 8-inches deep. 2. Seeded, Sodded, Shrub, and Ground Cover Beds: Provide not less than the following quantities of specified amendments: Specified Organic Matter: 5 Cubic Yards /1000SF Commercial Fertilizer: (20-10-5): 10 lbs./1000 SF Superphosphate: 10 lbs./1000 SF 3.7 PLANTERS STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 15 DHM Design Denver, CO A. Planters: Place at least a 4-inch (100-mm) layer of gravel in bottom of planters, cover with non-woven fabric, and fill with planter soil mixture. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2-inches (38-mm) below top of planter, allowing natural settlement. 3.6 SOIL MIX PLACEMENT FOR ROOFTOP PLANTERS AND POTS A. Placement Procedures and Restrictions: 1. Soil will be placed by 6-inch (15 cm) lifts within each layer and compacted to 85% Proctor or not to exceed 1.3 to 1.4 Mg/m3 bulk density. The compaction is best accomplished by hand tamping or lightweight rolling. Vibration tamping is not recommended. The density is to be verified by cone penetrometer readings (187 to 250 psi or 1.29 X 106 to 1.73 X 106 Pa) for each lift. However, some loosening of each lift surface will be required to prevent the formation of an interface or discontinuity between the layers, again to emulate the natural soil profile. Shallow profiles should be placed in lifts to provide for uniformity of packing in the entire volume. 2. Soil mixes shall not be handled, hauled or placed during rain or wet weather or when wet near or above field capacity. This restriction shall also apply to the plant installation operation as planting in wet weather can also have detrimental effects on the soil. 3. Careful sequencing of installation of the soil is just as important as the development of the mix. The lower soil layers are placed until the grade of plant rootball bottom is reached, then the plants placed and backfilled with the appropriate mix for the sequence of layers up to the surface. It is not recommended that the entire profile be placed and then excavated for plant placement; this causes the mixing of the layers upon backfilling. This consideration is less important for Alternate II and shallow rootballs. B. Stockpiling: 1. The stockpiling on-site should be restricted to no more than the needs of several days. Stockpiles of mixes S1, S1A and S2 should be no higher than 6 feet to prevent anaerobic conditions within the piles. The stockpiles should be sheltered from the elements to prevent excessive water absorption and blowing by high winds. These restrictions should apply to off-site or source stockpiling as well as on-site stockpiling. C. Post-Testing After Installation for Soil Performance: 1. In-place testing involves density tests during installation and after placement, permeability or drainage of the entire profile, and general conditions. This testing will be more of inspection and observation by on- site personnel than a large amount of laboratory testing. 2. In-place testing of infiltration and drainage can be accomplished in conjunction with testing the irrigation system. Probing of the soil across the planter to refusal depth and examining moisture content should suffice. One or two deeper holes should be augered to the soil profile STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 16 DHM Design Denver, CO bottom to check for saturated or perched condition above the gravel layer after heavy irrigation or precipitation. 3.8 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to assist drainage. Roughen sides of planting pit. 1. Balled and Burlapped Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball diameter. The depth of the plant pit shall be 2- inches less than the depth of the ball in well drained soils and 4-inches less than the ball depth in poorly drained soils. 2. Container-Grown Trees and Shrubs: Excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball diameter. The depth of all plant pits shall be 1-inch less than depth of ball. 3. Where drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile. B. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavation. C. Drainage: Notify Owner’s Representative if subsoil conditions evidence water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits. 1. Fill the pit with water and allow it to completely drain before planting occurs. 2. If water does not drain out of pit within 24 hours, notify Owner’s representative. 3.9 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit with top of ball raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated. 1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 2. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately ½ backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill. B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated. 1. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls. 2. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 17 DHM Design Denver, CO eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately ½ backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of backfill. C. Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. 1. Set collar 1-nch (25-m) below adjacent finish grades, unless otherwise indicated. D. Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3-inch- (75-mm-) high mound around the rim of the pit. Do not cover top of root ball with backfill. E. Wrap trees with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping. 1. No tree shall be wrapped after May 21 nor before November 1. 2. All deciduous trees shall be wrapped by November 15. Remove tree wrap by May 15. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for wrapping and unwrapping trees during the warranty period. 3.10 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Prune, thin, remove injured or dead branches, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect. 3.11 TREE AND SHRUB GUYING AND STAKING A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50- through 125- mm) caliper and Evergreen trees up to 8-oot height. Stake trees of less than 2- inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18-nches (450-m) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72-nches (1800-m) above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating balls or root masses. Support trees with 2 strands of tie wire fed through white PVC pipe and tree collar grommets. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Twist ends of wire and trim off excess. B. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake evergreen trees exceeding 8-eet and deciduous trees more than 5-inch caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 30-nches (760-m) long, driven to grade. Feed guy wire through white PVC pipe and hose chafing guard. C. Cover tie and guy wires with 1-inch white PVC pipe. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 18 DHM Design Denver, CO 3.12 PLANTING GROUND COVER AND PLANTS A. Space ground cover and plants as indicated B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. 3.13 MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, planted areas, non-irrigated zones, and other areas indicated. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: Apply pre-emergent herbicide to all shrub bed areas at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. Do not apply to annual, perennial, or ground cover areas. C. Weed-Control Barriers: Install weed-control barriers according to manufacturer's recommendations, before mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched, lapping and pinning edges a minimum of 6-inches (150-mm). D. Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems. 1. Thickness: 4-inches (100-mm) deep in shrub bed areas. E. Mulch tree rings in turf and native grass areas with 4-inch depth specified organic mulch. 3.14 SEEDING A. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. Deliver seed to job site in the original unopened containers and submit the certified labels to the Landscape Architect. B. Seed shall be uniformly sown by drill, by hydro-seeding (without mulch admixture), or by broadcasting. Hydro-seeding rates shall be doubled the amount specified. Broadcast seeding rates shall be one and a half times the amount specified. Broadcast seeding shall be raked or chain dragged into the soil to a depth of approximately one-quarter inch (1/4") to one-half inch (½"). C. The seeding shall be done in two (2) separate applications crossing the area at right angles to one another to guarantee even coverage. D. Protect seeded areas against erosion by uniformly spreading wood fiber mulch after completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2,000 pounds per acre. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 19 DHM Design Denver, CO E. Protect seeded slopes exceeding 4:1 against erosion with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.15 HYDRO SEEDING NEW LAWNS A. HYDRO SEEDING: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 2-step process. Apply first slurry application at the minimum rate of 500 lb. per acre (5.5 kg per 100 sq. m) dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate of 1000 lb. per acre (11 kg per 100 sq. m). 3.20 INSTALLATION OF EDGING A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30-inches (760-mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging. 3.21 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage. 1. When deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again 2 weeks after planting. 3.22 MAINTENANCE A. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and irrigation equipment to convey water from sources and to keep grasses uniformly moist to a depth of 4-inches (100-mm). 1. Water turf at the minimum rate of 1-inch (25-mm) per week. B. Post fertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb. per 1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg per 100 sq. m) of turf area. 3.23 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 LANDSCAPING 02900 - 20 DHM Design Denver, CO A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.24 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02900 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-1 DHM Design Denver, CO SECTION 02901 - SOIL AMENDMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Furnish and place compost as shown on the plans. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following: 1. Soil Amendment B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 02200 – Earthwork 2. Section 02900 - Landscaping 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Before delivery of the compost, provide Quality Control documentation that includes the following items as part of their submittal documents: 1. Documentation indicating the total volume of compost that is being calculated for application to each area listed. 2. A signed statement indicating that the compost being supplied meets the standards for the classification being specified. 3. A copy of the lab analysis of the product being supplied as performed by a STA-certified lab, or a lab utilizing the methods listed under Table 1. The lab analysis of the product shall be taken within 30 days of shipment of the product. 4. 1 cubic foot of soil amendment for each amendment type required for the Project, in zip-locked labeled plastic bags. 5. The feedstock by percentage in the final compost product. 6. A statement that the compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations. 7. A statement that the composting process has met time and temperature requirements. 8. A copy of the producer’s STA certification. B. Prior to placing material provide the following: 1. A completed copy of the soil amendment certification letter attached at the end of this document will be submitted to the landscape architect prior to use of material. 2. Manifests and/or scale tickets verifying delivery will be submitted to the STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-2 DHM Design Denver, CO landscape architect prior to use of material. 1.4 PRODUCTION: A. Provide a designated project stockpile of unblended compost for sampling and testing at the producer’s site. Samples from each stockpile will be taken for Quality Assurance (QA). Test the compost material by a STA-certified lab for the required QA testing. Include lab invoices for passing QA tests with the submittals. B. Maintain compost in designated stockpiles at the producer’s site until accepted by the Landscape Architect. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to sample compost at the job site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to inspect containers before or after installation to verify compliance with Specifications. B. Bulk Materials: Protect from rain wind and snow during and after delivery. 1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate placement of soil amendment materials during normal planting seasons for each type of material required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL AMENDMENTS: A. Furnish compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic matter and meets the requirements set forth by the United States Department of Agriculture and the United States Composting Council (USCC), “Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost” (TMECC), shown in Table 1. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure or other agricultural residuals, forest residues, bark, and paper. Ensure compost and wood chips do not contain any visible refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance considered to be harmful to plant growth. Do not use materials that have been treated with chemical preservatives as a compost feedstock or as wood chips. Do not use mixed municipal solid waste compost. Provide compost meeting all applicable United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40, Part 503 standards for Class A Bio-solids and with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPH&E) Regulation 64 regarding the manufacturing and distribution of compost with the State of Colorado. Meet the requirements of the USCC Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-3 DHM Design Denver, CO B. The contractor shall furnish, place, and incorporate compost on the project as described below. 1. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT): Furnish CMT consisting of 75% topsoil blended with 25% compost measured by volume. Use CMT that is either blended on-site (BOS) or pre-blended (PB). 2. Erosion Control Compost (ECC): Furnish ECC consisting of 50% untreated wood chips blended with 50% compost measured by volume. Use wood chips less than or equal to 5 in. in length with 95% passing a 2-in. screen and less than 30% passing a 1-in. screen. 3. General Use Compost (GUC): Furnish GUC consisting of 100% compost. C. Source: 1. Sod Areas – Class II Compost, Premium 3; as supplied by A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 800-776-1684, or approved equal 2. Shrub Beds, Perennial Beds, Tree Pits, Annual Beds and Mulch: Class I Compost, 100% BioComp, as supplied by A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, 800-776-1684, or approved equal. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-4 DHM Design Denver, CO Table 1 Physical Requirements for Compost Compost Parameters Reported As Test Method Test Method Name pH: Min 6 to 8 max. Class I Compost Min 6 to 8.2 max. Class II Compost TMECC 04.11-A Electrometric pH Determination for compost 1:5 Slurry method Soluble Salts 5.0 max *. dS/m Class I Compost 10.0 max.* dS/m Class II Compost TMECC 04.10-A 1:5 Slurry Method, Mass Basis” Nitrogen Total N TMECC 04.02-D Nitrogen. Total Nitrogen by Oxidation Phosphorus P2O5 TMECC 04.03-A Phosphorus. Total Phosporus Potasium K2O TMECC 04.04-A Potasium. Total Potasium Calcium Ca TMECC 04.04-Ca Secondary and Micronutriant Content. Calcium Magnesium Mg TMECC 04.04-Mg Secondary and Micro- nutreint Content. Magnesium Moisture Content % weight basis TMECC 03.09-A Total Solids and Moisture at 70+-5 C Particle Size: 95% passing 5/8 in., 70% passing 3/8 TMECC 02.02-B Sample Sieving for Aggregate Size Classification Organic Matter Content 25-65% (dry mass) TMECC 05.07-A “Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method Stability: 8 or below TMECC 05.08-B Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate Maturity (Bioassay) Percent Emergence Relative Seedling Vigor Greater than 80% Class I Compost Greater than 60% Class II Compost TMECC 05.05-A Seedling emergence and relative growth. Fecal Coliform Pass in accordance TMECC 07.01-B (US EPA 503) Coliform Bacteria Primary plant nutrients %, as-is (wet) & dryweight basis STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-5 DHM Design Denver, CO Maturity Indicator As expressed as AmmoniaN/Nitrate N Ratio <4 Class I Compost <6 Class II Compost Maturity Indicator As expressed as Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio <12 Class I Compost <18 Class II Compost Ag Index >10 Class I and II Compost * A soluble salt content up to 10.0 dS/m for compost used in CMT will be acceptable. A copy of the Compost Classification Chart, definitions and contact information is attached for reference at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL PREPARATION: Prepare the types of compost for use on the project and stockpile at the jobsite. The type and quantity of compost to be provided for each area of the project is listed below. Application Area Class of Compost Application Rate Notes Sod Areas Class II Compost; 5 cubic yards per Must be well Compost 1,000 square feet of incorporated Manufactured application area, or Topsoil 1-2/3” deep Shrub Beds, Class I Compost; 6 cubic yards per Must be well Tree Pits, Compost 1,000 square feet of incorporated Perennial Beds, Manufactured application area, or Annual Beds Topsoil 2”deep Top Dressing, Class I Compost; 1 to 2 cubic yards per Spread General Use 1,000 square feet of uniformly Compost application area or ¼” to 3/8” deep Mulch Class I Compost; 12 cubic yards per Spread General Use 1,000 square feet of uniformly Compost application area or 4” Depth A. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT): After excavation and embankment work is complete, remove and dispose of objectionable material from the topsoil before blending. 1. Blended On-Site (BOS). Apply compost in a uniform layer and incorporate into existing topsoil to a depth of 6 inches. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-6 DHM Design Denver, CO 2. Pre-blended (PB). Apply CMT in a uniform layer to the depth shown on the plans. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-7 DHM Design Denver, CO SOIL AMENDMENT CERTIFICATION LETTER Date: Addressee: Project name or identification number: LETTER OF CERTIFICATION (Manufacturer of product) hereby certifies that the soil amendment supplied to the referenced project meets or exceeds the class of material requested in the bidding documents. Further certifies that we are in full compliance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPH&E) Regulation 64 regarding the manufacturing and distribution of compost with the State of Colorado under permit # . (If exempt from permitting, state exempt in this area). If exempt, the manufacturer of the product certifies that production of the product meets or exceeds the requirements of CDPH&E Regulation 64. (Manufacturer or supplier) further certifies that the volume of each class of product as listed below was shipped to or supplied to the contractor for use on this project. Manifests and/or scale tickets verifying are attached A current, representative lab analysis taken within 90 days of shipment using methods required in the bidding documents of each class of material delivered to the project is attached. Product Volume Shipped Compost Class PRODUCT LEFT THE SITE IN A COVERED TRUCK: Yes ___ No ___ Date Submitted: Manufacturer or Supplier: Individual Signing Certification: (Print Name) Title of Individual: Signature of Individual: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SOIL AMENDMENT 02901-8 DHM Design Denver, CO END OF SECTION 02901 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO OCTOBER 31, 2011 TOPSOIL 02922 - 1 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO SECTION 02922 - TOPSOIL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTIONS A. Work Included: For areas not formally landscaped or covered under landscape topsoil specification. Stripping of existing topsoil, storage in stockpiles, replacement of topsoil after other work is completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL Material stripped from site consisting of loose, friable loam, reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, rocks, brush, weeds, or other material detrimental to proper development of vegetative growth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION Remove all sod, topsoil, organic earth. Stockpile topsoil as directed by Owner’s representative or Architect. 3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT A. General: When job has been shaped and ready for placement of topsoil, cover all cut-fill areas and construction scars with topsoil to depth of 6". Contour all surfaces in accordance with drawings to blend with existing adjacent terrain. Dispose of all excess topsoil off-site. B. Slope Rounding: Round top and bottom of slopes and feather into undisturbed natural terrain. Avoid abrupt grade changes by making smooth transitions from slopes to more level areas. C. Slope Molding: Avoid long, continuous slope faces by molding face of slope to accent existing adjacent terrain. Steepen slope faces near ridges and bluffs, laid back to link to natural draws, creating an undulating face. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO OCTOBER 31, 2011 TOPSOIL 02922 - 2 Alpine Engineering, Inc. Edwards, CO THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT INTENTIALLY BLANK END OF SECTION 02922 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Vapor retarders 5. Suspended slabs. 6. Concrete toppings. 7. Building frame members. 8. Building walls. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. E. Samples: For waterstops. F. Welding certificates. G. Qualification Data: For Installer; manufacturer; testing agency. H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. 14. Vapor retarders J. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances. K. Field quality-control test reports. L. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. H. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint- filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO reshoring procedures, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,. D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, I/II, gray. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 1. Available Products: a. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon CIA. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. d. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete CNI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI. D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set- accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. Available Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Catexol 1000CI. b. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN2. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. d. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete 222+. e. Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901. 2.7 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Carbon-Steel Fiber: ASTM A 820, deformed, minimum of 1.5 inches long, and aspect ratio of 35 to 40. 1. Available Products: a. Bekaert Corporation; Dramix. b. Fibercon International, Inc.; Fibercon. c. SI Concrete Systems; Zorex. 2. Fiber: Type 1, cold-drawn wire or 2, cut sheet. B. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. 1. Available Products: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100. 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono. 4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth. b. Fibrillated Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol F. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand F. 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta. 4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 5) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermesh. 2.8 WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 1. Available Products: a. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company; Volclay Waterstop-RX. b. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. c. Greenstreak; Swellstop. d. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. e. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20. f. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop. g. TCMiraDRI; Mirastop. 2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Grace Construction Products; Florprufe 120. 1. Available Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 1510. c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65G105. 2.10 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Available Products: a. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Available Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid. p. Unitex; Pro-Film. q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER. r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Available Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO l. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure. m. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Horncure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Maxcure Resin Clear. p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.12 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing and IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. See Structural General Notes. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. See Structural General Notes. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.15 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS Refer to Structural Drawings. 2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.17 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved[ at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 16 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 17 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to the following concrete surfaces: a. Bare concrete surfaces exposed to public view. b. Concrete surfaces with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete exposed to public view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in 1 direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings and to receive mortar setting beds for thick- set floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid- applied or sheet waterproofing, or membrane roofing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 18 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient sports flooring, wood flooring, carpet or carpet tile, ceramic or stone tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, epoxy, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F(L) 15; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 15; and of levelness, F(L) 10. 1) Areas: a) Parking Levels: Mechanical, Electrical, Equipment, Machine and similar Rooms; Vehicular surfaces. b) Areas to receive thick- set flooring. c) Subfloors under concrete toppings. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15. 1) Areas: a) Suspended slabs. E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or stone tile is to be installed by thin-set or medium-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 19 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel- finish concrete surfaces. 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 20 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Locations: 1. Parking Levels bare concrete not scheduled to receive concrete sealers (scheduled in Division 7 Section “Concrete Sealers”), traffic bearing membranes (scheduled in Division 7 Section “Traffic Bearing Membranes”), or other finish flooring materials. 3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month, subject to compliance with joint filler manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 21 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 22 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory- cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 23 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents. D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 03300 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 24 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 03542 - HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic-cement-based underlayment for use below interior floor coverings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certifying that products are compatible. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in writing that products are compatible. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete . b. Bonsal, W. R. Company; Self-Leveling Underlayment . c. Dayton Superior Corporation; LeveLayer I . d. Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right . 2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal substrates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. 1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosion-resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. E. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03542 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 04814 – CONCRETE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Standard concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Masonry Accessories, Anchorage, and Reinforcing". 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads of masonry walls. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Refer to Structural Drawings and Notes for general reinforcement requirements, grouting, and testing for load- bearing and non- load bearing concrete masonry as applicable to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. C. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed concrete masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with method indicated. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 . 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. B. Standard Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 . 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi . 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 , Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. E. Water: Potable. 2.4 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Concrete Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 , Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed- joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond ; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows : 1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch . 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE MASONRY 04814 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04814 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04816 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 04816 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Embedded flashing. 2. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads of masonry walls. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." D. Refer to Structural Drawings and Notes for veneer anchorage general materials and systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Weep holes/vents. 2. Accessories embedded in masonry. D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04816 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout that comes in contact with such masonry. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 . C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04816 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.018 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: 1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 3/4-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. Use only for weeps. D. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: 1. Description: Minimum 40 mils thick, cold applied, self-adhering sheet consisting of cross-laminated polyethylene film laminated to rubberized asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. 2. Surface Primer/Conditioner: Products provided by flashing manufacturer. 3. Available Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing – “CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing”. b. Grace Construction Products – “Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing”. c. Henry Co., Bakor, Inc. – “Blueskin TWF”. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MASONRY ACCESSORIES, ANCHORAGE, AND REINFORCING 04816 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. e. Polyguard Products, Inc. – “401 Membrane”. f. Williams Products, Inc. – “Everlastic MF-40”. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 04816 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 04851 - DIMENSION STONE CLADDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dimension stone: 1. Panels set with individual anchors at soffits, headers and sills. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in dimension stone cladding system with elastomeric sealants. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section. B. Dimension Stone Cladding System: An exterior wall covering system consisting of dimension stone panels together with anchors, backup structure, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone to building structure and to produce a weather-resistant covering. 1. Backup structure includes miscellaneous steel framing required to secure stone to building structure. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242-11. B. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. C. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7. D. Thermal Movements: Provide dimension stone cladding system that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing displacement of stone, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following safety factors: 1. Safety Factor for Quartz-Based Stone: 6. 2. Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 10 for stone varieties other than granite. F. Design stone anchors and backup structure to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stresses established by the following: 1. For Structural Steel: AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2. For Cold-Formed Steel: AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members." 3. For Cold-Formed Stainless Steel: ASCE 8, "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members." G. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection tolerances of building's structural system. Structural-steel fabrication and erection tolerances are specified in Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." H. Provision for Deflection of Building Structure: Allow for the following: 1. Deflection due to Weight of Dimension Stone Cladding System: Allow for 1/4-inch vertical deflection in 20-foot span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system. 2. Live Load Deflection: Allow for 1/4-inch vertical deflection, in 20-foot span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on building's structural frame after stone installation. I. Leakage Resistance, Water and Air: Provide dimension stone cladding system that complies with the following: 1. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration beyond plane of back of dimension stone cladding system that is not contained or drained back to exterior, as measured by testing mockup per ASTM E 331 at a differential pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. . J. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, chemical anchors, and other manufactured products indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone cladding system, including dimensions and profiles of stone units. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Show locations and details of joints both within dimension stone cladding system and between dimension stone cladding system and other construction. 2. Include details of sealant joints. 3. Show locations and details of anchors and backup structure. 4. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. a. Include pull- out calculations and supporting data for chemical anchors. C. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than 12 inches square. 1. Sets shall consist of at least three Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected and will establish the standard by which stone will be judged. D. Sealant Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. E. Welding certificates. F. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and professional engineer. G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency, as follows: 1. Stone Test Reports: For stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous five years. 2. For metal components, indicate chemical and physical properties of metal. 3. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension stone cladding systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate dimension stone cladding systems similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating dimension stone cladding and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory and other material from a single manufacturer for each product. E. Preconstruction Stone Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. 1. Furnish test specimens that are representative of materials proposed for incorporation into the Work. 2. Physical Property Tests: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, tested for compliance with physical property requirements, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. 3. Flexural Strength Tests: For each combination of stone variety, thickness, orientation of cut, and finish, proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 880, in both wet and dry conditions. 4. Anchorage Tests: For each combination of stone variety, orientation of cut, finish, and anchor type proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 1354. 5. Testing agency will report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor. F. Preconstruction Field Testing of Sealants: Before installing joint sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates per requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel"; and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. 1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect dimension stone cladding during erection as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place. 2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove such materials without damaging stone. 3. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and sealant droppings. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove and replace dimension stone cladding damaged by frost or freezing conditions. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction and protection requirements for masonry contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, flashing reglets, and similar items to be used by dimension stone cladding Installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimension stone cladding system. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Time delivery and installation of dimension stone cladding to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to dimension stone cladding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUARTZ-BASED STONE D. Variety and Source: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Reference Drawings for stone varieties, sources, descriptions, and colors. E. Finish: Match Architect's sample. F. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. G. Thickness: As indicated. 2.2 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304, temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 FRAMING FOR BACKUP STRUCTURE A. Miscellaneous Steel Framing: For framing members in contact with stone fabricate from same material and finish specified for anchors. For framing members not in contact with stone, comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M, minimum thickness of 3/16 inch. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed), or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn), minimum thickness of 3/16 inch. 3. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3, made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating, and not less than 0.108-inch nominal thickness. 2.4 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. B. Sealants for Joints in Dimension Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and do not stain stone. 1. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to comply with the following requirement: a. Match stone. C. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Same sealant used for joints in dimension stone. 2.5 STONE FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. B. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearance of 1 inch between backs of stone units and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and other work behind stone. C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports. D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place. E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples. F. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 3/8 inch wide and in locations indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO G. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to accommodate contiguous work. H. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust. I. Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups. 2.6 FABRICATION OF BACKUP STRUCTURE A. Fabrication of Miscellaneous Steel Framing: Fabricate in shop to comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," to accommodate construction tolerances specified, and as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Weld shop connections to comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 2. Fabricate joints to exclude water or to permit its escape to building exterior, at locations where water could accumulate because of condensation or other causes. 2.7 SHOP-PAINTED STEEL FINISHES A. General: Paint uncoated steel backup structure before delivering to Project site to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel." B. Surface Preparation: After completing fabrication of steel items, prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Apply one coat of fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#76. D. Apply two-coat high-performance coating system consisting of organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and topcoat of high-build urethane or epoxy coating recommended by manufacturer for application over specified zinc-rich primer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19 and M73/M75 Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Semi-Gloss. b. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313 and Devthane378 Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel. c. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670 and Aquapon 97-130 Epoxy. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer and Macropoxy HS High Solids Epoxy. e. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97 and Series 27 Hi-Build Epoxy. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality-Control Testing Service: Owner may employ an independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 1. Furnish test specimens selected by testing agency from same blocks as actual materials proposed for incorporation into the Work. B. Testing agency will report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding and conditions under which dimension stone cladding will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of dimension stone cladding. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING BACKUP STRUCTURE A. Installing Miscellaneous Steel Framing: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," and install to accommodate construction tolerances specified and as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Maintain erection tolerances of backup structure within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install by welding to structural-steel frame and other components as indicated. 3. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection. a. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 3.3 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING, GENERAL A. Before setting stone clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. B. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set. 1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. E. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 SETTING MECHANICALLY ANCHORED DIMENSION STONE CLADDING A. Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242. B. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant indicated for filling kerfs. C. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, corners and jambs within 20 feet of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, water tables, parapets, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch. E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/8 inch or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 60 inches of each other, do not vary more than 1/8 inch or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less from one to the other. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved samples. Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect approves methods and results. B. Replace in a manner that results in dimension stone cladding's matching approved samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses. Remove excess sealant and smears as sealant is installed. D. Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing, using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. END OF SECTION 04851 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 04860 - STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry: 1. Anchored to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing. 2. Coping and Trim units. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating stone masonry. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for dovetail slots in concrete for anchoring stone. 3. Division 4 Section "Masonry Accessories, Anchorage and Reinforcement" for concealed and through- wall flashing and miscellaneous accessories. 4. Division 4 Section “Dimension Stone Cladding” for suspended stone at soffits and other locations set with individual anchors. 5. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. C. Products installed, but not furnished, in this Section include: 1. Steel lintels for stone masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." D. Refer to Structural Drawings and Notes for veneer anchorage general materials and systems as applicable to this Section. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three samples in each set for each type of stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone provided will be judged. C. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, sources of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, from one quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANDSTONE A. Variety and Source: Subject to compliance with requirements, Match the following: 1. Stone Type No. 1: Vogelman Associates, Inc; “Colorado Buff Strip Stone”. 2. Stone Type No. 2: Vogelman Associates, Inc; “Vogelman Brown Chopped Stone”. B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. C. Thickness: As indicated. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Water: Potable. 2.3 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: At Cold Form Metal Framing: Sheet metal plate, 1 1/4 inches wide by 6 inch long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs of lenght to match thickness of insulation or sheathing; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inch long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs. : 1. Products: Basis of Design Product: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; "X-Seal Anchor" with X-seal tape E. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: At Concrete Substrate: Zinc alloy barrel section with flanged, gasketed head with eye and corrosion-resistive, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit substrate thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against face of substrate with flanges head covering hole in substrate: 1. Products: Basis of Design Product: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; "Concrete Seal Tie". 2.4 STONE TRIM ANCHORS A. Stone Trim Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone trim units and holes for fasteners or postinstalled anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or framing as indicated. B. Materials: Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Fasteners for Stone Trim Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1. 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N. 2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N . 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stone to comply with sizes, shapes, and tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. B. Cut and select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports. D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated. E. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as follows: 1. Patterns as indicated on Drawings. F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 4. Finish for Copings and Trim: Smooth. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and weather-resistant sheathing paper to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.3 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch at widest points. F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in stone masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across joint or space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches. Mechanically anchor top edge of flashing through sheathing to studs. 3. Seal top edge of flashing within masonry cavity with continuous rubberized asphalt flashing. 4. At lintels , extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with wire mesh and loop system indicated. Reference Structural drawings for additional information. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry as indicated, and with at least 5/8- inch cover on outside face. C. Space anchors as indicated. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. D. Anchor stone copings and trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening to substrate and inserting tabs and dowels into kerfs and holes in stone units. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar. E. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors into mortar joints as stone is set. F. Fill collar joint with grout as stone is set. G. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. 3.7 POINTING A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed. B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1. Joint Profile: Concave. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated. B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 3. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 3.9 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04860 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STONE MASONRY 04860 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel. 3. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 4. Division 9 painting Sections and Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer fabricator and testing agency. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Shear stud connectors. 6. Shop primers. 7. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CASE. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd. C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847, structural tubing. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard, Extra strong, and Double-extra strong. 2. Finish: Black. H. Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35, carbon steel. I. High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M,Grade 80-50, carbon or alloy steel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO J. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type. a. Finish: Plain Epoxy. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. F. Threaded Rods: A 572/A 572M, Grade 50. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel. H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. I. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer unless otherwise indicated. B. Reference Division 9 painting and coating sections for surface preparation, primers, and other requirements for structural steel to receive paint or high- performance coatings. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. 2.4 GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404, Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. 2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, [mechanically thermal cut, ]or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. H. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall- opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. I. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. J. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" for structural steel to receive primer only. 2. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" for structural steel to receive paint or high- performance coating systems. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M. 1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast- in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design Add leveling plates to paragraph below if required. Delete options in paragraph and subparagraphs if no bearing plates. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Design " for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO END OF SECTION 05120 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. 3. Noncomposite form deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 4. Division 9 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Welding certificates. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." E. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Deck West, Inc. d. Epic Metals Corp. e. HH Robertson. f. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. g. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. h. United Steel Deck, Inc. i. Verco Manufacturing Co. j. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard 2. Deck Profile: As indicated 3. Profile Depth: As indicated 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more 6. Side Laps: Overlapped 2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop primed with manufacturers' standard gray or white baked-on, rust- inhibitive primer. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As Indicated. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more 2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33minimum, with top and underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory- punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter. J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. K. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated on Structural drawings. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. F. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STEEL DECK 05310 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 9 Section C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load- bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold- Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products: 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. C. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in- house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Studco. 2. AllSteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 or equivalent. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90. 2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Section Properties: As indicated. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches . C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips as indicated, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. c. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538-inch. 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with enlarged service holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 or ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out- of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire- resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim including loading-dock edge angles. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Metal bollards. 8. Pipe guards. 9. Abrasive metal nosings. 10. Trench drains (indoor pool/ spa). B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs." 4. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 5. Division 5 Section "Gratings." 6. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings." 7. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction" for timber connectors. 8. Division 10 Section "Wire Mesh Partitions." 9. Division 15 Plumbing Sections for trench drain waste piping connections. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Metal nosings and treads. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. 4. Trench drains. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. D. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section “Interior Painting” and Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated. 2.12 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 2. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum- oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 3. Galvanize exterior ladders and interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners. 2.13 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all 4 corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.14 PIPE GUARDS A. Fabricate pipe guards from 1/4-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 1/2-inch anchor bolts. B. Galvanize pipe guards after fabrication. 2.15 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast gray iron, Class 20 , with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc., MODEL No. 816. 2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches wide with 1-inch lip, for casting into concrete steps. 2.16 TRENCH DRAINS A. High profile, 2-inch opening, polymer concrete trench drain system, neutral invert, with stainless steel edge rail, grate, end caps, and accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Manufacturer: ACO Polymer Products, Inc.: MiniKlassik KS50 NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED. a. Grate: Part No. 95165 stainless steel perforated grate, Load Class A. 2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.5 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches above driving surface. 3.6 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation. 3.7 INSTALLING TRENCH DRAINS A. Install in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Ornamental steel-framed stairs. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in metal stairs. 3. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 4. Division 5 Section "Fabricated Spiral Stairs". 5. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 6. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 7. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood treads and risers at ornamental steel- framed stairs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction . b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer . 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 2. Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). C. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. D. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section “Interior Painting”. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. D. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS (FIRE STAIRS) A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0677 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS (INDIVIDUAL LIVING UNITS) A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. B. Metal Subtread Stairs: Form risers, subtreads, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm). 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Directly weld metal subtreads and risers to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by wood treads. Locate welds on risers on backside and grind smooth. 3. Provide subplatforms of configuration the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. 2.8 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. As detailed. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.9 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL STAIRS 05511 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 4. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting and coating Sections. END OF SECTION 05511 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel tube railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from pipes and tubes. 3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction . b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer . 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) orASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or chemical anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections and Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO I. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. J. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparation for Shop Priming (Galvanized Railings): After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. F. Preparation for Shop Priming (Nongalvanized Railings): Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: 1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Installing posts in concrete: Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. 3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting and coating Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05521 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05530 – AREAWAY GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bar gratings. 2. Metal frames and supports for gratings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 5 Section "Elevator Sump Pit Gratings". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 125 lbf/sq. ft. or concentrated load of 2000 lbf, whichever produces the greater stress. B. Seismic Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual ." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Welded Steel Grating : 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 7/16 or 1/2 inch o.c. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: As required to comply with structural performance requirements. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 3/16 inch. 4. Crossbar Spacing: 4 inches o.c. 5. Traffic Surface: Applied abrasive finish consisting of aluminum-oxide aggregate in an epoxy-resin adhesive . 6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. of coated surface. 2.6 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long. B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of gratings, frames, and supports, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. B. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05530 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 AREAWAY GRATINGS 05530 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05532 – ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Areaway Gratings" for metal gratings for other locations and uses. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Gratings: Provide gratings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Floors: Uniform load of 125 lbf/sq. ft. or concentrated load of 2000 lbf, whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Limit deflection to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating gratings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: a. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. b. Fisher & Ludlow. c. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2.4 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS A. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gratings: Bar gratings made by placing glass-fiber strands that have been saturated with thermosetting plastic resin in molds in alternating directions to form interlocking bars without voids and with a high resin content. 1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch- square mesh, thickness as required to comply with structural performance requirements . 2. Resin: Polyester . 3. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Traffic Surface: Plain, meniscus . B. Fabricate cutouts, if any, in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 2.5 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: Fabricate from glass- fiber-reinforced plastic shapes of sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use shapes made from same resin as gratings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ELEVATOR SUMP PIT GRATINGS 05532 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 3.2 INSTALLING GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use manufacturer's standard stainless-steel anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections. END OF SECTION 05532 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05715 - FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fabricated spiral stairs with steel central-supporting columns and radiating treads. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for paint systems for metal components, not including prefinished components, of fabricated spiral stairs. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering stairs and railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 2. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: One-fourth of anchor's tested capacity when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide fabricated spiral stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 40 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. C. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction . b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Seismic Performance: Provide fabricated spiral stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation instructions and data for accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts other anchorage devices specified for installation under other Sections. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Treads. 2. Railing members. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for fabricated spiral stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Duvinage Corporation. 2. Spiral Stairs of America. 3. Stairways Inc. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 88-S Line Rail, Stairways Inc. 1. Turn: 450 degrees. 2. Radius: 3’-8”. 3. Center column: 6-inch diameter, with flat top. 4. Platform: 90 degrees at upper landing. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported item, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 STEEL A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Pipe Columns: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Schedule 40. Provide Schedule 80 for columns more than 4-1/2 inches in OD and where required to support loads. 2.5 STAINLESS STEEL A. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304. B. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. C. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: For connecting stair components and for anchoring stairs to other construction, select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections capable of withstanding design loadings. 1. For steel and cast iron, use plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Comply with Division 9 Section “Interior Painting”. C. Wood for Stair Treads, Handrails, and Platforms: Laminated oak, no nosings, sanded to 120-grit smoothness. Apply stain to match unit wood flooring. Finish with uniform coat of manufacturer's standard clear polyurethane sealer, gloss to match unit wood flooring. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Assemble spiral stairs in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. D. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive hardware, screws, and similar items. F. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and, except for fillet welds, welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate center column from stainless steel pipe welded to baseplate for anchorage to floor structure. Brace column at upper floors by means of landings attached to column and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO floor structure, unless otherwise indicated. Provide stainless steel cap for column if top is exposed. I. Provide steel-framed treads and platforms welded to hubs or center column and without legs; wearing surface as follows: 1. Wood. J. Railings: Provide railing system indicated, uniformly bent to spiral shape, and continuing at top to form guard rail around floor opening. 1. Space intermediate rails less than 4 inches (101 mm), clear. 2. Locate bottom rail so that a 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter sphere cannot pass between the stair and rail. 3. Fabricate top rail from wood, 1-1/2-inches by 2-inches. 4. Fabricate intermediate rails from 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) OD round stainless steel bars. 2.8 METAL FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC's surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed stairs: 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." B. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 2.10 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish indicated, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FABRICATED SPIRAL STAIRS 05715 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed for securing fabricated spiral stairs to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Assemble fabricated spiral stair components to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, with each component aligned and in correct relation to each other, securely anchored to the supporting column and adjacent structure. C. Do not cut, alter, or drill stair components in the field that do not fit properly. Return components that do not fit to manufacturer for adjustment. D. Install fabricated spiral stairs accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; level and plumb; and according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install fabricated spiral stairs by welding to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. F. Field Welding: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material. B. Protect finished tread surfaces during construction by covering with 1/2-inch thick plywood secured with plastic strapping or another nonmarring fastening method. END OF SECTION 05715 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel and iron ornamental railings. 2. Post-supported railings with glass infill. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings included with metal stairs. 2. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 3. Division 6 Section " Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for wood railings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open- sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 3. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass." B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction . b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Each type of glass required. 2. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer . F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL A. Wire Rope and Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cable Connection (The). b. Carl Stahl DecorCable, Inc. c. Feeney Wire Rope & Rigging. 2. Wire Rope: 1-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 304. 3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, or if not indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard components with inline tensioners and dome nut terminations; fabricated from stainless steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. 2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Clear Glass: Class 1 (clear). 2. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than thickness as indicated on Drawings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide tamper-resistant hardware of types indicated for exposed fasteners. D. Anchors: Provide anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support indicated loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. L. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.8 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels. B. Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparation for Shop Priming (Galvanized Railings): After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process. 1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. E. High-Performance Coating Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS A. Bar-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing fabricator's written instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts, bars, and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made by Owner . B. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and will comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting and coating Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05721 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction." 2. Division 6 Section "Sheathing." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Preservative and fire- retardant treated wood products: Comply with manufacturer’s requirements. Protect from moisture where required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof construction. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Battens. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M . B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material (Interior Exposures): Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material (Exterior, Humid, and Corrosive Exposures): Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06100 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using timbers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with heavy timber construction. 2. Division 6 Section "Wood Decking" for wood decking. 3. Division 6 Section "Structural Glued-Laminated Timber" for glued-laminated timber. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products and timber connectors. 1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For timber connectors, include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: For heavy timber construction. Show layout, dimensions of each member, and details of connections. C. Samples: Not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance, including surface texture, of wood products. Apply a coat of penetrating sealer to Samples. D. Material Certificates: 1. For heavy timber construction specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. E. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade stamp. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIMBER A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view, or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. B. Timber Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch. 1. Allowable Stress Ratings for 12-Inch Nominal Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. D. Dressing: Provide dressed timber (S4S) unless otherwise indicated. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA C15 requirements for "sawn building poles and posts as structural members." B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. 1. Use preservative solution without water repellents or substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. D. After treatment, redry timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. E. Mark treated timber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on surface that will not be exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 2. Application: Treat all heavy timber construction unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with bearing plates, 3/4-inch- diameter-by-12-inch- long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch side plates. C. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch stirrups and 0.239-inch top plates. D. Fabricate strap ties from steel as indicated. E. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. F. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; provide nuts complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, provide flat washers. G. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal members and inclined members with a slope of less than 1:1, with natural convex bow (crown) up, to provide camber. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Shop fabricate members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. C. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. D. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for treated wood where the treatment included a water repellent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Install heavy timber construction to comply with Shop Drawings. 2. Install horizontal and sloping members with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. 3. Handle and temporarily support heavy timber construction to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches; do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 3. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. D. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 06130 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD DECKING 06150 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06150 - WOOD DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-sawn wood roof decking. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with wood decking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. B. Samples: 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of wood decking. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Decking: Comply with AITC 112. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Stack wood decking with surfaces that are to be exposed in the final Work protected from exposure to sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD DECKING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD DECKING 06150 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD DECKING A. Decking Species: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-larch (North). B. Decking Nominal Sizes: 2x6 and 3x6 as indicated. C. Decking Grade: Select(ed) Decking or Select Dex. D. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply grade stamp to surfaces that will not be exposed to view. E. Face Surface: Smooth. F. Edge Pattern: Vee grooved. G. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat solid-sawn wood decking according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX) and redry wood to 15 percent maximum moisture content. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Solid-Sawn Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with decking standard for thickness of deck used. B. Nails: Common; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type I, Style 10. C. Spikes: Round; complying with ASTM F 1667, Type III, Style 3. D. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel. E. Sealant: Elastomeric joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. F. Penetrating Sealer: Clear sanding sealer complying with Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" and compatible with topcoats specified for use over it. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication: Where preservative-treated decking is indicated, complete cutting, trimming, surfacing, and sanding before treating. B. For 3-inch-thick nominal decking, predrill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking standard. C. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing decking, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD DECKING 06150 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and support framing in areas to receive wood decking for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wood decking. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install solid-sawn wood decking to comply with referenced decking standard. 1. Locate end joints for lay-up as directed by Architect. B. Where preservative-treated decking must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. For solid-sawn decking, use inorganic boron (SBX). C. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations: 1. Between decking and supports located at exterior walls. 2. Between decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of decking. 3. Between tongues and grooves of decking over exterior walls and supports at exterior walls. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary waterproof covering as the Work progresses to protect roof decking until roofing is applied. END OF SECTION 06150 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WOOD DECKING 06150 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 4. Rigid insulation beneath nail base insulated roof sheathing. 5. Building paper. 6. Building wrap. 7. Air and vapor barrier 8. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing and where indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry " for plywood backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 2. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 2. Foam-plastic sheathing. 3. Building paper. 4. Building wrap. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type unless otherwise indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Roof sheathing. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard Type X" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 3. At curved (barrel vault) construction, provide equivalent thickness using layered or kerfed plywood, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Atlas Roofing Corporation; ACFoam " II", or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Cornell Corporation. b. Hunter Panels. 2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: 2.5 inches . 2.6 COMPOSITE NAIL BASE INSULATED ROOF SHEATHING A. Vented, Plywood- Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: Rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, with plywood adhered to spacers on one face. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Atlas Roofing Corporation; ACFoam, "Crossvent", or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Cornell Corporation. b. Hunter Panels. 2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: 3 inches . 3. Plywood Nominal Thickness: 5/8 inch fire rated. 4. Spacers: Manufacturer’s standard EPS or wood furring strips or blocks, not less than 1 inch thick and spaced not more than 12 inches o.c. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M . B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954. E. Screws for Fastening Plywood-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion- protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 2.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1, Grade D (water-vapor-permeable, kraft building paper), except that water resistance shall be not less than 1 hour and water-vapor transmission shall be not less than 75 g/sq. m x 24 h. 1. Product: "Super Jumbo Tex 30 Minute", Fortifiber Building Systems Group. 2. Locations: a. Underside of exterior balconies over conditioned space. b. Other locations indicated. B. Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1, Grade D (water-vapor-permeable, kraft building paper), except that water resistance shall be not less than 1 hour and water-vapor transmission shall be not less than 75 g/sq. m x 24 h. 1. Product: "Super Jumbo Tex 60 Minute", Fortifiber Building Systems Group. 2. Locations: a. Exterior walls with masonry and plaster finishes. b. Other locations indicated. C. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 163 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 4. Locations: a. Exterior walls with metal and fiber- cement siding. b. Other locations indicated. 5. Provide manufacturer’s standard accessories for a complete integrated system. D. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.9 AIR and VAPOR BARRIER A. Non-permeable single component latex back W.P. air and vapor barrier. NFP285 Approved. Basis of Design Barritech – NP. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch . 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self-Adhered Flashing . B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. C. Prefabricated Flashing Panels For Penetrations: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable products include but are not limited to the following: 1. Quickflash Weatherproofing Flashing Panels; Quickflash Weatherproofing Products, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Screw to metal roof deck. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply two layers. Apply as recommended by manufacturer. Apply each layer horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.5 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 06160 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEATHING 06160 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06185 - STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 2. Division 6 Section "Heavy Timber Construction" for framing using timbers. 3. Division 6 Section "Wood Decking" for wood decking. 4. Division 9 Section "High Performance Coatings" for coatings for timber connectors fabricated from stainless steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors, include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. 3. Include large-scale details of connections. C. Samples: Full width and depth, 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of structural glued-laminated timber, including variations due to specified treatment. 1. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half length of each Sample. D. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors, from the ICC. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: See Structural drawings. C. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins: 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: See Structural drawings. 2. Lay-up: Balanced. D. Appearance Grade: Architectural, complying with AITC 110. E. Preservative Treatment after Fabrication: Where preservative-treated structural glued- laminated timber is indicated, pressure treat after fabrication according to AWPA C28. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Use preservative solution without substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. F. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. G. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless-steel plate and flat bars complying with ASTM A 666. 2. Stainless-steel bars and shapes complying with ASTM A 276. 3. Stainless-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 666. B. Fabricate beam seats from stainless steel with 3/8-inch bearing plates, 3/4-inch- diameter- by-12-inch- long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch side plates. C. Fabricate arch base shoes from stainless steel with 1-inch base plates and 3/8-inch side plates. D. Fabricate beam hangers from stainless steel with 0.179-inch stirrups and 0.239-inch top plates. E. Fabricate hinge connectors from stainless steel with 0.179-inch side plates and 3/4-inch top and bottom plates. F. Fabricate strap ties from stainless steel, 2-1/2 inches wide by 0.179 inch thick. G. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. H. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length and after preservative treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for preservative-treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. 2. Install structural glued-laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings. 3. Install timber connectors as indicated. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches; and do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 1. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. END OF SECTION 06185 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER 06185 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim for the following exterior applications: a. Typical and Juliet balcony railing top rails. b. Typical and Juliet balcony railing fascia and trim not indicated as heavy timber construction. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 7 Section "Siding" for fiber-cement siding and trim. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. C. Compliance Certificates: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment quality mark. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 4. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 5. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood. 2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque-Stained and Painted Finish: 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade C and Better Clear ; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners. B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight- fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. D. Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 06201 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Wood stair treads and risers. 4. Wood ceilings. 5. Wood paneling and wainscots. 6. Wood cabinets. 7. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 8. Plastic-laminate countertops. 9. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 10 Section “Wood Lockers” for ski lockers. 3. Division 12 Section "Stone Countertops" for natural stone countertops. 4. Division 12 Section "Engineered Quartz Countertops" for engineered stone countertops. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate,fire-retardant-treated materials,cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 3. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. 4. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge. 5. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products, or Shop that employs skilled workers who install products similar to those required for this Project and whose installations have a record of successful in-service performance.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Systems Coordination: Distribute copies of approved Shop Drawings to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other providers requiring coordination with interior architectural woodwork fabricator and installer. Coordinate fabrication and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reference “OZ PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific selections including veneer species, stains, colors and sealers, plastic laminates, and decorative hardware types and finishes. B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, minimum 47-lb. density. 2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf, respectively. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Reference “TRH PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific decorative hardware selections not indicated, including types and finishes. B. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. F. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed- steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Provide stainless steel fasteners and anchors for construction and attachment of interior architectural woodwork at Pool Room B108 and at other high- humidity and corrosive areas where interior architectural woodwork is provided. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Species and Cut: Reference “TRH PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections. B. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom- grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. B. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. B. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Fire Rating: As indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.8 WOOD STAIR TREADS AND RISERS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Oak, quarter sawn. 1. Thickness: Nominal 2-inch-thick lumber. 2. Finish: Match adjacent wood flooring. B. Attach treads and risers as indicated. 1. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position and no more than 1/16 inch out of position for adjacent treads and risers. 2.9 WOOD CEILINGS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 1. Reference “TRH PRODUCT INFORMATION” Data Sheets following Division 9 Specification Sections for specific member sizes, shapes, species, and finishes. 2.10 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay . B. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 2.11 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay . B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. C. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. D. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. 2.12 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. B. Edge Treatment: PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish . C. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard . D. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue or medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue . E. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.13 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling, end-grain surfaces, and woodwork located in areas with high humidity and areas where above- normal fluctuations in humidity are anticipated. Concealed surfaces of plastic- laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. 2. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 3. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 5. Sheen: Match Architect's sample . STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full- length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. H. Paneling and wainscots: Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. I. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. J. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Waterproofing Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. B. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. or less. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. B. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls. 1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete and Masonry Backup for Stone Masonry : Apply by spray coat at a rate not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. Brush or roller application is not acceptable. B. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer by spray coat at manufacturer’s recommended rate. Apply dampproofing by spray coat at a rate not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. Brush or roller application is not acceptable. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. END OF SECTION 07115 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Pre-applied sheet membrane waterproofing 2. Self-adhering sheet waterproofing 3. Molded-sheet drainage panels / integral base drain. 4. Insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 12-by-12-inch square of insulation. 3. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materialsand molded-sheet drainage panels through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing until mockups are approved. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of twoyears. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRE-APPLIED SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING A. Pre-applied Integrally Bonded Sheet Waterproofing Membrane (Vertical Applications): Preprufe® 160R Membrane by Grace Construction Products, a 1.0mm (0.032 in) nominal thickness composite sheet membrane comprising 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) of high density polyethylene film, and layers of specially formulated synthetic adhesive layers. The membrane shall form an integral and permanent bond to poured concrete to prevent water migration at the interface of the membrane and structural concrete. Provide membrane with the following physical properties: Property Test Method Typical Value Color White Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.0 mm (0.032 in.) nominal Lateral Water Migration Resistance ASTM D5385, Modified1 Pass at 71 m (231 ft) of hydrostatic head pressure Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 Unaffected at -29°C (- 20°F) Elongation ASTM D 412 Modified2 500% Crack Cycling at -23°C (- 9.4°F), 100 Cycles ASTM C 836 Unaffected, Pass Tensile Strength, film ASTM D 412 27.6 MPa (4,000 lbs/in.2) Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 Modified3 880 N/m (5.0 lbs/in.) Lap Adhesion ASTM D 1876 Modified4 880 N/m (5.0 lbs/in.) Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D 5385 Modified5 Pass at 71 m (231 ft) Puncture Resistance ASTM E 154 445 N (100 lbs) Permeance ASTM E 96 Method B 0.6 ng/Pa x s x m2 (0.01 perms) Water Absorption ASTM D 570 0.5% B. Pre-applied Integrally Bonded Sheet Waterproofing Membrane (Below Elevator Slab): Preprufe® 300R Membrane by Grace Construction Products, a 1.2mm (0.046 in) nominal thickness composite sheet membrane comprising 0.8 mm (0.030 in.) of high density polyethylene film, and layers of specially formulated synthetic adhesive layers. The membrane shall form an integral and permanent bond to poured concrete to prevent water migration at the interface of the membrane and structural concrete. Provide membrane with the following physical properties: Property Test Method Typical Value Color White Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.2 mm (0.046 in.) nominal STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Lateral Water Migration Resistance ASTM D 5385 Modified1 Pass at 71 m (231 ft) of hydrostatic head pressure Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 Unaffected at -29°C (- 20°F) Elongation ASTM D 412 Modified2 500% Crack Cycling at -23°C (- 9.4°F), 100 Cycles ASTM C 836 Unaffected, Pass Tensile Strength, film ASTM D 412 27.6 MPa (4,000 lbs/in.2) Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 Modified3 880 N/m (5.0 lbs/in.) Lap Adhesion ASTM D 1876 Modified4 880 N/m (5.0 lbs/in.) Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D 5385 Modified5 71 m (231 ft) Puncture Resistance ASTM E 154 990 N (221 lbs) Permeance ASTM E 96 Method B 0.6 ng/Pa x s x m2 (0.01 perms) Water Absorption ASTM D 570 0.5% 2.2 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing System (Below Grade Elevator Pit Walls): Bituthene® System 4000 Membrane by Grace Construction Products; a self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet consisting of a thickness of 1.4 mm (0.056 in.) of rubberized asphalt and 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) of cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film specially formulated for use with water-based surface conditioner. Provide rubberized asphalt membrane covered with a release sheet which is removed during installation. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps. Property Test Method Typical Value Color Dark gray-black Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) nominal Flexibility, 180° bend over 25 mm (1 in.) mandrel at -43°C (-45°F) ASTM D 1970 Unaffected Tensile Strength, Mem- brane Die C ASTM D 412 Modified1 2240 kPa (325 lbs/in.2) minimum Tensile Strength, Film ASTM D 882 Modified1 34.5 MPa (5,000 lbs/in.2) minimum Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt ASTM D 412 Modified1 300% minimum Crack Cycling at -32°C (- 25°F), 100 Cycles ASTM C 836 Unaffected Lap Adhesion at Minimum Application Temperature ASTM D 1876 Modified2 880 N/m (5 lbs/in.) Peel Strength ASTM D 903 Modified3 1576 N/m (9 lbs/in.) Puncture Resistance, Membrane ASTM E 154 222 N (50 lbs) minimum Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D 5385 70 m (231 ft) of water Permeance ASTM E 96, 2.9 ng/m2sPa STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Section 12 – Water Method (0.05 perms) maximum Water Absorption ASTM D 570 0.1% maximum 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. C. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating. D. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforced tape, 4-1/2 inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film on self-adhering side. E. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9- inch centers. 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side witha polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic- sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft.. B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Hydroduct 220. C. Pre- fabricated soil sheet drain. 1. AMERDRAIN: Total- Drain; prefabricated base drain. D. Pre- fabricated T-connectors 2.5 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square or shiplap edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates: 1. Do not proceed with installation until concrete has properly cured and dried (minimum 7 days for normal structural concrete and minimum 14 days for lightweight structural concrete). 2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface. 3. Repair bugholes over 13 mm (0.5 in.) in length and 6 mm (0.25 in.) deep and finish flush with surrounding surface. 4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area. 5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface. 6. Masonry Substrates: Apply waterproofing over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar joints or parge coat. 7. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashing as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Horizontal Surfaces - The substrate must be free of loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Avoid curved or rounded substrates. When installing over earth or crushed stone, ensure substrate is well compacted to avoid displacement of substrate due to traffic or concrete pour. The surface does not need to be dry, but standing water must be removed. 3.3 INSTALLATION, HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONS (Pre-Applied Sheet Membrane Waterproofing) A. Strictly comply with installation instructions in manufacturer’s published literature, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Place the membrane HDPE film side to the substrate with the clear plastic release liner facing towards the concrete pour. End laps should be staggered to avoid a build-up of layers. 2. Leave the plastic release liner in position until overlap procedure is completed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Accurately position succeeding sheets to overlap the previous sheet 3 in. (75 mm) along the marked selvedge. Ensure the underside of the succeeding sheet is clean, dry and free from contamination before attempting to overlap. 4. Peel back the plastic release liner from between the overlaps as the two layers are bonded together. Ensure a continuous bond is achieved without creases and roll firmly with a heavy roller. 5. Completely remove the plastic liner to expose the protective coating. Any initial tack will quickly disappear. 3.4 INSTALLATION, VERTICAL APPLICATIONS (Pre-Applied Sheet Membrane Waterproofing) A. Strictly comply with installation instructions in manufacturer’s published literature, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanically fasten the membrane vertically using fasteners appropriate to the substrate with the clear plastic release liner facing towards the concrete pour. The membrane may be installed in any convenient length. 2. Fastening through the selvedge using a small and low profile head fastener so that the membrane lays flat and allows firmly rolled overlaps. 3. Immediately remove the plastic release liner. 4. Ensure the underside of the succeeding sheet is clean, dry and free from contamination before attempting to overlap. 5. Roll firmly to ensure a watertight seal. 6. Overlap all roll ends and cut edges by a minimum 3 in. (75 mm) and ensure the area is clean and free from contamination, wiping with a damp cloth if necessary. 7. Allow to dry and apply Preprufe Tape LT (or HC in hot climates) centered over the lap edges and roll firmly. 8. Immediately remove printed plastic release liner from the tape. 3.5 SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION (Self Adhering Sheet Waterproofing) A. Install sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. C. Vertical Applications: Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar anchored into substrate and cover with detailing tape. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape. E. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling. F. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie into adjacent waterproofing. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape. H. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. B. Integrate molded-sheet drainage panel with pre-fabricated base drain as per manufacture recommendation. 3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness and R value over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. 3.9 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07131 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07142 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Substrate primers. 2. Reinforced waterproofing membranes. 3. Protection courses. 4. Drainage courses. 5. Insulation. 6. Deck pavers on sand bed. B. Areas to receive waterproofing include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Terraces and balconies over occupied spaces. 2. Other horizontal substrates over occupied spaces, not including roofing systems over occupied spaces. 3. Below- grade horizontal substrates enclosing occupied spaces. 4. Planter vertical and horizontal substrates over or enclosing occupied spaces. 5. Elevator pits. 6. Other areas indicated. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water and complies with physical requirements in CAN/CGSB-37.50, "Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. 1. Include Setting Drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of concrete pavers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. E. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's and Installer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed to install waterproofing manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranty specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and drainage panels through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Apply waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. of each type of area and substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality. Install pavers to demonstrate aesthetic affects and quality of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 deg F. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Manufacturer or Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Manufacturer's Total System Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that do not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/8 inch in width. 2. Warrant that insulation will retain 80 percent of original published thermal value. 3. Warrant that pavers will not dish or warp and will not crack, split, or disintegrate in freeze-thaw conditions. 4. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, and for horizontal applications with pavers, pedestals and pavers. 5. Warranty Periods: a. Horizontal applications: 1) 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Vertical Applications: 1) 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers’ Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products: 1. Horizontal Applications with pavers: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Ultimate Assembly/ MM6125-FR, American Hydrotech, Inc., 2. Horizontal Applications without pavers; Vertical Applications: a. MM6125-FR, American Hydrotech, Inc., 3. Include all materials, components, and accessories required to provide complete, warranted, watertight assemblies, including but not necessarily limited to hot fluid- applied membranes, reinforcing fabrics, protection courses, drainage courses, insulations, and pavers. 2.2 MEMBRANE A. Single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt with the following properties measured per applicable test methods in CAN/CGSB-37.50: 1. Flash Point: Not less than 260 deg C or not less than 25 deg C above manufacturer's maximum recommended application temperature. 2. Cone Penetration: 110 maximum at 25 deg C, and 200 maximum at 50 deg C. 3. Flow: 3 mm maximum at 60 deg C. 4. Toughness: Not less than 5.5 J. 5. Ratio of Toughness to Peak Load: Not less than 0.040. 6. Adhesion Rating: Pass. 7. Water-Vapor Permeance: 1.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m. 8. Water Absorption: 0.35-g maximum mass gain, or 0.18-g maximum mass loss. 9. Pinholing: Not more than one pinhole. 10. Low-Temperature Flexibility: No cracking. 11. Crack Bridging Capability: No cracking, splitting, or loss of adhesion. 12. Heat Stability: Comply with requirements for penetration, flow, low-temperature flexibility, and viscosity when heated for five hours at manufacturer's recommended application temperature. 13. Viscosity Test: 2 to 15 seconds. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer. B. Flashing and Reinforcing Membranes: 1. Uncured Neoprene: a. Minimum Thickness: 60 mils. b. Product: Flex-Flash UN, American Hydrotech. 2. Spunbond Polyester: a. Minimum Weight: 1.3 oz/sq. yd. b. Product: Flex-Flash F/ Vertical, American Hydrotech. 3. Open- weave Fiberglass: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Product: Flex-Flash F, American Hydrotech. C. Protection Course/ Separator Sheet: 1. Fiberglass reinforced, rubberized asphalt. 2. Minimum thickness: 85 mils. 3. Product: Hydroflex 30, American Hydrotech. D. Drainage Course/ Filter Fabric: 1. Premanufactured crush- proof geotextile. 2. Product: Hydrodrain 400, American Hydrotech. E. Root Barrier: 1. High density polyethylene sheet. 2. Minimum thickness: 27 mils. 3. Product: Root Stop HD, American Hydrotech. F. Sealants and Accessories: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. 2.4 INSULATION A. Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, acceptable to waterproofing membrane manufacturer, complying with ASTM C 578; of type, density, and compressive strength indicated below. 1. Horizontal Applications: Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 60-psi minimum compressive strength; fabricated with one side having ribbed drainage channels. 2. Vertical Applications: Type IV, 1.55-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 30-psi minimum compressive strength; fabricated with shiplapped or rabbeted edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. 2.5 DECK PAVERS A. Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, acceptable to waterproofing membrane manufacturer, chamfered top edge, manufactured for use as deck pavers; minimum compressive strength 8000 psi, ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Prest Pavers, Hanover Architectural Products, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Mutual Materials. b. Tile Tech Pavers. c. Westile Roofing Products. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Size: 12 inches square by 1 ½” inches thick. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/8 inch in length, height, and thickness. 3. Color: Limestone Gray. 4. Finish: Tudor. B. Sand for Sand Bed: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. 1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, "Application STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing," and waterproofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258. 2. Moving joints and cracks over 1/8-inches in width: Adhere strip of elastomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of moving joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond deck drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3. Non- moving joints and cracks not exceeding 1/8-inch in width: Embed reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches on each side of joints and cracks and beyond deck drains, corners, and penetrations. B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joints and adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot fluid- applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply rubberized asphalt according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, "Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing," and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil- or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically designed for heating rubberized-asphalt waterproofing. C. Start application with manufacturer's technical representative present. D. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry. E. Reinforced Membrane: Apply waterproofing to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to a thickness of 90 mils; embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches; and spread another 125-mil- thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils thick. F. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. G. Cover waterproofing with protection course/ separator sheet with overlapped joints while rubberized asphalt is still hot and before membrane is subject to traffic. H. Install root barrier at horizontal and vertical surfaces of planter waterproofing membranes and flashings. Install as recommended by manufacturer, lapping adjacent sheets 5 feet (1.5 m), or provide 1 foot (300 mm) overlap if installing with taped seams. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.5 DRAINAGE COURSE INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install board insulation or protection course as indicated before installing drainage panels. 3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations. 1. Thickness: As indicated. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units into rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 DECK PAVER INSTALLATION A. Review paver installation procedures with waterproofing manufacturer prior to installation. B. Place sand bed and screed to a thickness of 2 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. C. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb sand bed. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. D. Vibrate pavers into sand bed with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and sand bed on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into sand bed. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. F. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. G. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet flashings. 2. Flood each area for 48 hours. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight. C. Owner may engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. 3.9 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed insulation and drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction END OF SECTION 07142 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-1 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO SECTION 07180 - CONCRETE SEALERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Conditions of Contract for Construction and General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 Work Included A. Work of this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and supervision to install concrete sealer including surface preparation. B. Provide and install penetrating silane sealer to all concrete floor surfaces in the parking garage not receiving traffic bearing membrane (deck coating) system. Extend sealer 24” up vertical concrete surfaces directly adjacent to the floor surfaces receiving sealer. C. Provide and install penetrating silane sealer to all vertical concrete surfaces directly adjacent to surfaces receiving traffic-bearing membrane system from 4” to 24” above the finished floor. 1.3 Related Work A. The following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittal Procedures Section 01330 2. Quality Requirements Section 01400 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 4. Traffic-Bearing Membranes (Deck Coating) Section 07570 5. Joint Sealants Section 07920 6. Pavement Markings Section 09920 1.4 Quality Control A. General 1. Sealer Installer shall be approved by sealer Manufacturer. 2. Sealer Installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in application of one of the approved concrete sealers and have experience for a project in size of 25,000 SF or greater. 3. Manufacturer is to individually code each sealer drum prior to shipping. Each drum is to be specifically and permanently identified with markings provided both on drum and removable drum cap (drum seal). A listing of this identification, along with Manufacturer's invoice, is to be submitted to Engineer prior to sealer STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-2 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO application. Each cap is to be submitted to Engineer with appropriate pay request. No payment will be made for material if properly identified cap is not submitted. 4. Manufacturer shall make available a qualified Representative to assist Installer and Engineer as specified herein. Representative shall be experienced in placement of the sealer. As a minimum, Representative shall be on site to review the following: a. Trial area preparation and sealer installation. b. First phase of concrete surface sealer installation. 5. Contractor shall notify Engineer 5 days in advance prior to installing sealer. B. Trial Area Requirements 1. Prepare three 100 SF trial areas of concrete surface incorporating all of the required preparation. Engineer, Manufacturer's Representative, and Installer shall be in agreement that surface preparation in trial areas is satisfactory before preparation of concrete surfaces is continued. 2. Apply sealer in two of the 100 SF trial areas to review method of application and verify that treated surface is not glazing. One of the 100 SF areas is to remain untreated. If sealer causes glazing, Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide written recommendations for solving problem. Engineer, Manufacturer’s Representative, and Installer shall be in agreement that application in trial areas is satisfactory before further application of sealer. 3. Manufacturer shall obtain two core samples for each of two 100 SF trial areas that were treated and 100 SF trial area left untreated. Appropriate tests shall be performed on concrete core samples to determine product compatibility, recommended surface preparation, application rate, and to establish baseline for level of chloride ions, depth of penetration, and water absorption in accordance with Warranty requirements of this Section. C. Testing Requirements 1. Refer to Section 01400, Quality Requirements. 2. Testing agency shall obtain concrete sealer samples at point of application to concrete. Each sample will consist of approximately two pints of material. Sampling will be random, but as a minimum, will be taken as follows: a. One sample for each 55 gallon drum. b. One sample for every 5,000 square feet of slab surface sealed. c. Timing of sampling will be at the Engineers discretion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-3 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3. Measure total solids content for concrete sealer. Test results indicating solids content less than Manufacturer's certified solids content used in NCHRP 244 testing will be cause for rejection of all Work corresponding to test sample. 4. Concrete sealer material will be "fingerprinted" using infrared spectra analysis. Sample infrared spectra data not corresponding to NCHRP 244 infrared spectra data will be cause for rejection of all Work corresponding to test sample. 1.5 Submittals A. For record certification that concrete sealer is compatible with all products in Divisions 3, 7, and 9 to which it will come in contact. B. For review and approval Manufacturer’s Spec Data Sheets of each product to be used. C. For record Material Safety Data Sheets of each product, solvent, or related chemicals to be used and certification that the materials conform to local, state, and federal environmental and worker’s safety laws and regulations. D. For review and approval upon request qualifications of Manufacturer's Representative. E. For record upon request qualification statement of Installer stating projects, size and location. F. For record sequence of sealer placement. Note: Sealer installation shall be coordinated to allow required minimum concrete cure times. G. For record upon request certification that sealer delivered to site conforms to all published data and that sealer chemical composition is same as that tested under NCHRP 244, Concrete Sealers for Protection of Bridge Structures. H. For record results of slab moisture testing completed in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by Plastic Sheet Method. I. For record certification of trial area acceptance. J. For record, listing of drum seal identification and drum seal caps. K. For record copies of purchase orders indicating quantities of sealer. L. For record results of core samples. M. For review and approval sample Warranty prior to application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-4 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1.6 Environmental Requirements A. Manufacturer and Installer are required to confirm that all materials used in accordance with this Section conform to local, state, and federal environmental and workers' safety laws and regulations. 1. VOC content of materials shall not exceed the limits per Environmental Protection Agency National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings (40CFR59). B. Installer is solely responsible for fume control and shall take all necessary precautions against injury to personnel or adjacent building occupants during application. As a minimum, Installer shall take the following precautions: 1. Provide and maintain barricades. 2. Locate and protect building air intakes during application. 3. Follow all state, federal, and local safety regulations. 4. Follow all Manufacturer's safety requirements. 5. Dispose empty containers immediately and properly. 6. Use protective equipment. 7. Ensure work area is well vented to the exterior. 1.7 Transportation and Handling A. Deliver sealer to site in original, unopened containers, bearing following information: 1. Name of product 2. Name of Manufacturer 3. Date of manufacture 4. Lot or batch number B. Store sealer under cover and protected from weather. C. Replace containers showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to Owner. D. At no time shall the weight of the stored material placed on a slab area exceed 30 PSF or 2,000 lbs. over 20 square inches. 1.8 Warranty A. Provide to Owner a Warranty by Manufacturer and Installer indicating square footage and actual rate of application and indicating that new concrete surfaces treated with sealer will meet following: 1. Surfaces will not absorb more than 250 ppm of soluble chloride at a depth of 1- 1/4 to 1-3/4 inches over an established soluble chloride baseline for duration of Warranty. Testing to be completed in accordance with AASHTO T 260. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-5 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2. Surfaces will not absorb more than 1.0 percent water by weight over established water absorption baseline for duration of Warranty. Testing to be completed in accordance with ASTM D 6489 – Standard Test Method for Determining Water Absorption of Hardened Concrete Treated with a Water Repellant Coating. B. Warranty shall be “Joint and Several” in which Installer and Manufacturer will jointly and severally warrant and provide at no charge to Owner materials and labor needed to properly repair or replace product and replace parking stripes within duration of Warranty. In event of either party’s non-performance, full burden and responsibility for any Warranty repair shall fall upon remaining party. C. Approximately one year prior to end of Warranty concrete shall be tested by Manufacturer against baseline tests for level of chloride ions, depth of penetration, and water absorption. Concrete core samples shall be taken at Owner's expense at baseline locations and forwarded to Manufacturer for testing. At Owner's discretion, additional cores may be forwarded to an independent testing agency for simultaneous testing. D. If sealer fails to meet requirements set forth in Warranty, material shall be reapplied at no expense to Owner. Retreatment of surfaces shall be governed by effectiveness as determined in nearest adjacent test site and shall not extend to other areas where sealer performance is within specified limits. 1.9 Warranty Duration A. The bid price shall include a five (5) year Warranty for 40 percent silanes commencing with date of project acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. B. Although completed areas of facility may be opened to traffic and parking, commencement of Warranty period will not occur prior to acceptance of entire project. A single Warranty commencement date will apply to all waterproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Concrete Sealer A. Sealer shall be solvent based penetrating silane chemical capable of reducing ingress of water and chlorides. Sealer to contain fugitive dye for application verification. B. Sealer to have minimum of 40 percent solids with a VOC content meeting requirements of this specification. Application rate to be a maximum of 125 SF per gallon. Maximum application rate is not to be modified for actual solids content. C. Approved solvent based silane sealers are: 1. Sil-Act ATS-42, Advanced Chemical Technologies, Oklahoma City, OK. 2. Silane 40 VOC, Hydrozo, BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-6 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3. Iso-Flex 618-40VOC, LymTal International, Inc., Orion, MI. 4. Sure Klean Weather Seal SL40, Prosoco, Inc., Lawrence, KS. 5. Chem-trete BSM 40 VOC, Sivento, Inc., subsidiary of Degussa-Huls Corporation, Somerset, NJ. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 General A. Inspect surfaces to receive Work and report immediately in writing to Engineer as required in General Conditions any deficiencies in surface which render it unsuitable for proper execution of this Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Commencement of Work implies acceptance of related Work. B. Coordinate and verify that related Work meets the following requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces have been finished, cleaned and prepped, as recommended by Manufacturer for system to be installed. 2. Curing compounds used on concrete surfaces have been removed. 3. Concrete surfaces have completed proper curing period for system selected. 3.2 Preparation A. Remove all oil, grease, and contaminants in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. All surfaces shall be air blown with sufficient pressure to remove excess dirt, dust and debris, and to assure that concrete is clean prior to application of ssealer. C. Installer shall be responsible for repair or replacement of all materials damaged by surface preparation operations. 3.3 Installation/Application A. Do all Work in strict accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and specifications and as indicated on Drawings. B. Do not apply sealer until the concrete has been air dried at temperatures at or above 40 degrees F. for at least 28 days after curing period specified in Section 03300, Cast-In- Place Concrete, or as otherwise approved by Manufacturer. C. Concrete must be dry prior to application of concrete sealer. Contractor shall perform slab moisture testing in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. Testing must be per- STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-7 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO formed in at least one (1) location for every 25,000 SF of sealer. The use of heat lamps for performing tests may be required in areas not exposed to sunlight. D. In event of surface wetting all concrete to be treated shall be air dried for at least 72 hours at temperatures above 50 degrees F. immediately before applying sealer. E. Ambient and concrete temperatures shall be between 40 and 100 degrees F. F. Do not apply sealer until crack, control, construction, and cove sealants are fully cured. G. Apply concrete sealer after silicone sealants have fully cured a minimum of 14 days. Do not allow 100 percent silanes to puddle on silicone sealants as the silicone sealants will swell. H. Use following applicable method(s) to apply sealer: 1. Low pressure hand sprayer 2. Spray distribution bar 3. Brush and roller I. When pressurized distribution equipment is used to apply sealer, use flow-controlled and pressure regulated equipment. J. Surfaces to be sealed shall be divided into areas in accordance with specified yield for specific container size of sealer. Area is to be divided by chalk lines, keel marks, or another Engineer approved method. Sealer shall be applied by placing material directly within grid. K. Sealer shall be applied at numerical rate (125 SF per gallon) specified unless a lower numerical rate (SF per gallon) is required to meet Warranty requirements based on testing completed core samples. 3.4 Cleanup A. Clean all surfaces subjected to sealer overspray and repair all damage caused by overspray to adjacent construction or property at no cost to Owner. B. Remove all masking materials. END OF SECTION 07180 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07182 - TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications: 1. Balconies not receiving waterproofing systems incorporating pavers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for permanent metal forms for concrete substrates. 3. Division 7 Section "Hot- Fluid- Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing at balconies incorporating pavers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1. Provide stepped Samples on backing large enough to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Material Certificates: For each traffic coating, signed by manufacturers. E. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals. Identify substrates and types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of traffic coatings required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer. 2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before installing traffic coatings, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, manufacturer's technical representative, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities. Review requirements for traffic coatings. Notify participants at least seven days before conference. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information: 1. Manufacturer's brand name. 2. Type of material. 3. Directions for storage. 4. Date of manufacture and shelf life. 5. Lot or batch number. 6. Mixing and application instructions. 7. Color. B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate. B. Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse. 1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Adhesive or cohesive failures. b. Abrasion or tearing failures. c. Surface crazing or spalling. d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957. B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.2 TRAFFIC COATING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide traffic coating systems by one of the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide, “Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.: CCW-5013 HD, Heavy Duty Pedestrian Traffic Coating Deck System or comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. b. General Polymers. c. Neogard Division, Jones-Blair Co. d. Pacific Polymers. e. 3M Specified Construction Products Division. B. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid poly-urethane elastomer. C. Topcoat: Single- or multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. D. System Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than 40 mils dry film thickness (measured excluding aggregate): E. Aggregate: Uniformly graded, washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Topcoat: As required to achieve slip-resistant finish. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining. 1. Minimum Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm). 2. Material: Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry. 4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. a. Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. b. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer. 5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch. 1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. 2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form- release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion. 4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. 3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft. B. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated, and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. C. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced testing procedures. 3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application. 4. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07182 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07182 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes penetrating water-repellent coatings to be applied to exposed building exterior stone and concrete surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that water repellents comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Test Application: Apply a finish sample for each type of water repellent and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample. 1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect. 2. Size: 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m). 3. Final approval by Architect of water-repellent application will be from test applications. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F. 2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for more than 28 days. 3. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Application proceeds more than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 5. Substrate is not frozen, or surface temperature is above 40 deg F. 6. Windy conditions do not exist that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, monomeric compound containing 90 percent or more active alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 3.3 lb/gal. or less of VOCs. 1. Products: a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; Sil-Act Multiguard. b. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Baracade Silane 100. c. Wacker Chemical Corp.; SilRes BS 1316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough. 1. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents. B. Test for pH level, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.3 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water- repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 07190 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Self-supported, spray-applied foam- plastic insulation. 3. Slag wool blanket insulation 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Sound attenuation insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Sections "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing” and “Hot Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulation and insulated drainage panels installed with waterproofing. 2. Division 7 Section "EPDM Membrane Roofing” for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system. 4. Division 9 Sections "Portland Cement Plaster", "Gypsum Board Assemblies", and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide glassslag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. At plenum return air spaces and other areas indicated, provide insulation with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 10 and 10, respectively. a. Acceptable Product: Owens Corning; Sonobatts. B. Provide high density unfaced fiberglass insulation in thicknesses and/ or R values indicated at the following locations: 1. Underside of exterior balconies over conditioned space. 2. Other locations indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.4 SPRAY-APPLIED FOAM- PLASTIC INSULATION A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Foam Plastic Insulation: Proprietary low- density, open- cell modified polyicynene. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Icynene Insulation System Spray Formula; Icynene, Inc. b. Locations: At all exterior door and window head and jambs rough openings and shim space. 2.5 SLAG-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Rock/Slag Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1, consisting of fibers and the by-product of steel production, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 0 and 0, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Basis of Design: Roxul CavityRock MD a. EPA Choice Fiber: 75 percent recycled content. b. Thickness: 1 1 /2 inches B. Accessories: As required, including hangers and furring. 1. Impaling pins; manufacturers standard 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. 1. Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. B. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively. 1. Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR. 2. Locations: One- hour- rated exterior walls. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Composite Air Barrier/Vapor Retarder: Nonwoven, unperforated polymer sheet laminated to Grade “D” asphalt- saturated kraft building paper and weighing not less than 7.9 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0025 perm. 1. Available Product: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Two Ply Weather Tex. 2. Locations: High density blanket insulation at underside of exterior balconies over conditioned space. D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. E. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. F. Continuous Insulation: Install to framing according to manufacturers recommendations. 1. Mechanically attach insulation with pins, space as required for securing to framing, locate pins maximum of 2 inches away from the edge of insulation. 2. Seal all penetrations and joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. At exterior walls to receive metal panel or siding install insulation between Z-furring as indicated in sections. G. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. D. Apply self-supported, spray-applied foam plastic insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs, rafters, and other framing members by method recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Installunfaced glassfiber blanket insulation at locations and in thicknesses indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07311 – ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 3. Substrate boards. 4. Vapor retarder. 5. Ridge vents. 6. Snow brackets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For asphalt shingles, ridge and hip cap shingles, ridge vent, snow brackets.. C. Product test reports. D. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Material Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first ten years nonprorated. 2. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 90 mph for five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install underlayments within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GAF “Timberline” or comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Owens Corning. c. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40- mil- (1.0- mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GAF “StornGuard” or comparable product by one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. W.R. Grace & Co. c. Henry Co. 2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDER A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.5 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GAF “Snow Country” or comparable product by one of the following: a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent II. b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; V-Series. c. Owens Corning; VentSure Ridge Vent. 2.6 SNOW BRACKETS A. Manufacturer’s standard shape, 16 gage steel, powder-coated, color as selected by Architect. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TRA Snow and Sun, Inc. “Snow Bracket D” or comparable product subject to approval by Architect. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, [barbed] [smooth] shank, sharp- pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. 2.8 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Felt Sheet: Install in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Bond vapor retarder to substrate as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Apply adhesive at rate recommended by felt sheet manufacturer. Seal laps with adhesive. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system. 3.4 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer’s written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayments as recommended by manufacturer. C. Provide surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayments as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior walls. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side. 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 24 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches. 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 24 inches, and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches. 8. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. 3.5 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.6 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip [with tabs removed] [at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide] with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. E. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point. 1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open valley flashings. F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. 3.7 RIDGE VENT A. Install manufacturer’s ridge vent system incorporating ridge risers, ridge nailer, roll ridge vent, and required accessories. Comply with manufacturer’s installation recommendations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.8 SNOW BRACKETS A. Comply with manufacturer’s installation recommendations. END OF SECTION 07311 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07412 - METAL SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal siding. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating metal siding. 2. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for support framing, including girts, studs, and bracing. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for continuous weather- resistive barrier systems. 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal work that is not part of metal siding assemblies. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Metal Siding Assembly: Metal siding, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Metal siding assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design metal siding assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. D. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft.. 1. Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on system's normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage. F. Structural Performance: Provide metal siding assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal siding assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/360 of the span. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of siding and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal siding; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Anchorage systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal siding indicated with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Siding: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal siding accessories. 2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal siding assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and wall-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Siding and attachments. 2. Stud framing. 3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures. 4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities. G. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer . H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. I. Field quality-control reports. J. Maintenance Data: For metal siding to include in maintenance manuals. K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal siding from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal siding, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal siding for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal siding in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal siding horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal siding to ensure dryness, with positive slope for STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO drainage of water. Do not store metal siding in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal siding for period of metal siding installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal siding to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal siding fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal siding assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal siding assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer’s Special Weathertightness Warranty for Metal Siding: Submit Manufacturer’s warranty, on warranty form acceptable to Owner, signed by Manufacturer and Installer, in which Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace metal siding assemblies that fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIDING MATERIALS A. Titanium-Zinc Sheet: DIN EN 1179, 988, 612. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Exposed Finish: Preweathered. 3. EURO – Norm Standard – DIN EN 988 2.2 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements . 2. Depth: As indicated . C. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Siding Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 2.5 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL SIDING A. General: Provide factory-formed metal siding designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Reveal-Joint, Concealed-Fastener Metal Siding: Formed with horizontal panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with narrow reveal joint between panels. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Firestone Building Products Company, "UC - 501 Flush Reveal Panel, Horizontal Reveal Panel, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Metecno-Morin. b. Umicore Building Products. c. Elward Systems 2. Material: Preweathered Titanium-Zinc sheet, 20 gage (0.040-inch) thick, as manufactured by Rheinzink; or comparable product by one of the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1) VMZinc as manufactured by Umicore Building Products b. Color: Prepatina Graphite- grey, from Rheinzink’s Patina finish line 3. Panel Length: Nominal 120 inches 4. Panel Height: 11 inches face dimension. 5. Reveal Height: 1/2 inch. 6. Panel Depth: 1 inch. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal siding assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal siding, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal siding. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal siding profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from titanium-zinc sheet, in thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal siding. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal siding and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal siding in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal siding joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal siding manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal siding manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal siding supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal siding manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal siding manufacturer. 3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. 4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal siding to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal siding before metal siding installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous siding support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal siding manufacturer's written recommendations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 METAL SIDING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal siding according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal siding and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Commence metal siding installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative. 2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal siding. 3. Flash and seal metal siding at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by metal siding are installed. 4. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 6. Install flashing and trim as metal siding work proceeds. 7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 8. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 9. Align bottom of metal siding and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 10. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Fasteners: 1. Titanium-Zinc Siding: Use stainless-steel fasteners. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal siding manufacturer. D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal siding assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal siding manufacturer. 1. Seal metal siding end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal siding manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Install components required for a complete metal siding assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Remove and replace metal siding where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal siding is installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal siding installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal siding manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal siding installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. C. Replace metal siding that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07412 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL SIDING 07412 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07413 - METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing-seam metal roof panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating Standing-seam metal roof panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed fasciae,flashings, and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof drainage systems, and other roof specialties not part of metal roof panel assemblies. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section. 5. Division 16 Section “ Gutter and Downspouts Snowmelt Systems” 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.007 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: Negative 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference. 3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference. 3. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference. E. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH. F. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. 2. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span. 4. Snow clamps forces at standing seam ribs. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Flashing and trim. b. Additional stiffener at standing seam rib for snow clamps. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. E. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single manufacturer. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Titanium-Zinc Sheet: DIN EN 1179, 988, 612. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Finish: Preweathered. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip- resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Grace Ice & Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.4 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Double Standing Seam Roofing, Firestone Building Products Company, "UC-3" or comparable product by one of the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Umicore Building Products VM Zinc. b. Metecno-Morin; Division of Metecno Inc. 2. Material: Preweathered Titanium-Zinc sheet, 0.032-inch thick. a. Color: Pre- weathered Graphite- grey. 3. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: 0.062-inch thick, stainless-steel sheet. 4. Joint Type: Double lock. 5. Panel Coverage: 12 inches. 6. Panel Height: 1.0 inches. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, minimum 0.022 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. 2.6 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, non corrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Seam-Mounted, Bar Type Snow Guards: Aluminum rods or bars held in place by stainless steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing seam metal roof panels. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide, “TRA- MAGE, Inc.: “C22Z Series Clamp–On 2 Pipe Snow Fence.” or comparable product. a. Alpine SnowGuards, Div. of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc.; Clamping Snow Guard. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.8 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. D. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3- 1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply over entire roof surface. B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. C. Install metal roof panels as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative. 2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted. 3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 4. Provide metal closures at rake walls and each side of ridge caps. 5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. 6. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 7. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. D. Fasteners: 1. Titanium-Zinc Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners. E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4. Do not penetrate exposed decking with panel fasteners. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 METAL ROOF PANELS 07413 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07413 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO SECTION 07460 - SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber-cement siding. 2. Fiber-cement soffit with battens. 3. Water resistive air barrier B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for Exterior Envelope Mockup incorporating siding. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for wall sheathing and weather-resistive barriers. 4. Division 9 Section “Painting” 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required. 1. 24-inch- wide-by-36-inch- high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required, from the ICC E. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding, soffit, and related accessories to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding and soffit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming 2. Warranty Period, from date of Substantial Completion: a. Materials: 50 years. b. Installation: 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Certainteed “Select Cedarmill” or comparable product by one of the following: a. James Hardi b. Nichiha Fiber Cement. 2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 7-1/4 inches wide for 6 inch exposure. 3. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide, “CertainTeed Corp “WeatherBoards” (Smooth): B. Ventilation: Continuous soffit vent strip extruded from high- density polypropylene. 1. Available Product: Cor-A-Vent, Inc; S-400 Vent Strip. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standards. C. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.3 WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 1. Primary water-resistive air barrier sheet membrane shall be RevealShield™ Water- Resistive Vapor Permeable Air Barrier Sheet by VaproShield, a zero VOC mechanically attached water-resistive, vapor permeable air barrier sheet membrane consisting of multiple layers of UV stabilized material with integrated tape at horizontal seams, having the following properties: a. Color: Black with allowable UV exposure for 180 days total before being covered by cladding b. Air Leakage: < 0.00004 cfm/sq.ft. (0.0002 L/s/sq.m) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 and < 0.000034 cfm/sq.ft. (0.00017 L/s/sq.m) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 c. Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 42 perms (262.6 g/m2) d. Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage e. Tensile Strength tested to ASTM D 828: 44.8 lbf/inch (68 N/mm), machine direction; 21.3 lbf/inch (37.3 N/mm), cross-machine direction f. Application Temperature: No temperature restrictions g. Surface Burning Characteristics tested to ASTM E 84: Class A, Flame-spread index of less than 10, Smoke-development index of less than 135 h. Physical Dimensions: 0.020 inches (0.51 mm) thick and 59 inches (1.5 m) wide and 5 oz per sq. yd. (170 g/sq. m). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Auxiliary Materials 1. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Water-resistive air barrier sealant compatible with sheet membrane shall be Dow Corning® 758, a modified silicon-based Sealant tested for compatibility with VaproShield products. 3. Water-Resistive Air Barrier Transition And Flashing Membranes a. Mechanically attached air barrier transition and flashing membrane shall be RevealFlashing™ by VaproShield, a Black, highly UV stable, zero VOC mechanically attached water-resistive vapor permeable membrane having the following properties: 1) RevealFlashing™: 6 1/2 inches or 11 3/4 inches wide x 164 feet long 2) Air Leakage: < 0.0000263 cfm/sq. ft. @ 75 Pa (0.000134 L/s/m sq @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 3) Water Vapor Permeance tested to ASTM E 96 Method B: 42 perms (2875ng/Pa.s.m2) 4) Water Resistance tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage 4. Window and door flashing shall be VaproLiqui-Flash by VaproShield, a liquid-applied vapor permeable air barrier flashing material with vapor permeance and resistance to air leakage properties compatible with the primary air barrier membrane. 5. Water-resistive weather barrier batten and ventilation accessories by VaproShield shall be made of black PVC material 6. Water-Resistive Flashing And Penetration Tapes a. Tapes shall be VaproTape™ by VaproShield: UV stable, single sided, moisture- resistant flexible tape with adhesive backing, tested for compatibility with VaproShield products, having the following properties: 1) VaproTape UV-Resistant Black: 35 mil thick by 4 inches (102 mm) wide penetration seam tape 2) VaproAlumaTape: 20 mil thick by 4.5 inches (114 mm) and 9 inches (229 mm) wide, foil faced, UV stable, moisture-resistant flashing and membrane transition tape for use with silicone sealants 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide, CertainTeed Corp “WeatherBoards” or comparable product by one of the following: 1. James Hardie. 2. Nichiha Fiber Cement. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO C. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of ¾ or 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Refer to Division 09 Section “Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing”. D. Neoprene Rubber Stripping: Closed cell self adhering trips 1. Thickness: 1/8 inches E. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Door and window casings 2. Fasciae. 3. Battens, moldings and trim. F. Colors for Decorative Accessories: As indicated by manufacturer's designations G. Concealed Flashings and Transitions: Provide as indicated or required at windows, doors, and other openings in siding to maintain weathertight assembly. H. Exposed Flashing: Provide prepainted metallic- coated steel sheet flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" where indicated. 1. Finish for Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet Flashing:High-performance organic finish, color as indicated by manufacturer’s designations I. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate. 2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate. 3. For fastening fiber cement, use stainless-steel fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding and soffit and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Install z-shaped furring vertically, with shorter flange attached to substrate, refer to manufacturers recommendation for fastener recommendation and spacing. C. Verify proper installation of insulation prior to installation of siding. 3.3 INSTALLTION WATER RESISTIVE AIR BARRIER A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the Work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrates. B. All surfaces must be sound, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants detrimental to the adhesion of the water resistive air barrier flashings. Fill voids, gaps in substrate to provide an even surface. Strike masonry joints full-flush. C. Minimum application temperature self-adhered membrane flashings to be above 20 degrees F (minus 6.0 degrees C). D. Ensure all preparatory Work is complete prior to applying primary water-resistive weather barrier membrane. E. Mechanical fasteners used to secure sheathing boards or penetrate sheathing boards shall be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid backing. F. Protect wall areas covered with primary water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier from damage due to construction activities, high wind conditions, and extended exposure to inclement weather. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SIDING A. General: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. B. Install fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories. Install soffit and trim as indicated in ceiling plans and details. 1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. C. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SIDING 07460 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07460 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO SECTION 07531 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 2. Loosely laid and ballasted EPDM membrane roofing system. 3. Vapor retarder. 4. Roof insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: 1A-90 2. Hail Resistance: SH STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 10 lb of aggregate ballast in gradation and color indicated. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Walkway pads or rolls. 5. Termination bars. 6. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. E. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC- ES H. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class Afor application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. F. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Directed by General Contractor or Construction Manager prior to beginning of roofing work. Conduct conference at Project site. G. Discussion shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Contract Document requirements. 2. Roof plan. 3. Roofing and flashing details. 4. Drain and scupper elevations. 5. Roofing manufacturer's specifications and details. 6. UL and FMG requirements. 7. Insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Available on- site storage. 9. Roof protection from damage by other trades. H. Attendance is required for: 1. General Contractor or Construction Manager. 2. Metal deck contractor. 3. Roofing contractor's superintendent. 4. Roofing system manufacturer’s representative. 5. Sheet metal contractor performing metal flashing work. 6. Installers of rooftop units and other work in and around roofing. 7. Mechanical contractor. 8. Plumbing contractor. 9. Architect. 10. Owner. 11. Other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner’s insurers, testing agencies and governing authorities. I. Minimum two weeks prior to conference forward pertinent information to General Contractor or Construction Manager for review. 1. Installation drawings. 2. Manufacturers’ product data. 3. Samples of proposed materials. 4. Sample warranties. 5. Other information deemed pertinent for sound and secure application. J. Conference shall review specifications, details, application requirements and preliminary work. K. Objectives of Preinstallation Conference to include: 1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks); inspect and discuss condition of substrates, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others. 3. Review structural loading limitations of decks during and after roofing and inspect decks for loss of flatness and for required attachment. 4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents). 5. Review warranty requirements. Discuss inter- related responsibilities. Identify and resolve warranty conflicts, overlapping or competing requirements, or any other issues that may compromise issuance of warranties, or warranty claims. 6. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 7. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 8. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 9. Discuss sequencing and scheduling. 10. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. 11. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. 12. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 15. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 16. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached. a. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. L. Furnish copy of record to each party who may be affected by roofing work, (whether or not in attendance) and to Owner and Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer’s Special Roofing Warranty: 1. Submit a 30-year weather-tightness warranty signed by the manufacturer. a. Warranty to include materials and installation. b. Membrane manufacturer will in a timely manner, upon Owner’s written request and in reference to a specific question, concern or problem, conduct an inspection of the roofing assembly at any time during the life of the warranty. 2. Warrant the entire roofing system, including but not necessarily limited to: membrane, flashings, adhesives, sealants, counterflashings, insulation, fasteners, fastener plates, fastener strips, hard rubber or metal edging, metal termination bars, sheet metal copings and edge metal, and flashings at penetrations. 3. Scope of coverage: a. Repair any leak in the roofing system caused by the ordinary wear and tear of the elements, manufacturing defects, and workmanship used to install these materials. 4. Limit of liability: No Dollar Limitation. 5. Edge metal, copings, and flashings at penetrations shall be furnished by the roofing system manufacturer and covered by manufacturer’s warranty. a. Submit a 20-year warranty on 70% PVDF fluoropolymer coatings on coil- coated edge metal, copings, and other pre- painted sheet metal components. C. Installer’s Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form acceptable to Owner and Manufacturer, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MANUFACTURER’S ONSITE RESPONSIBILITIES A. When roofing is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will provide: 1. Written reports to the Architect indicating the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Inspections at appropriate intervals that will insure proper roofing system installation, but not less than one visit during each week roofing installations occur. 3. Reports to the Architect in writing documenting any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor’s attention. 4. After completion, confirmation in writing that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications or with manufacturer’s installation requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: EPDM roofing systems are based on Firestone Building Products systems and products. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EPDM roofing systems by the named manufacturer or one of the following: 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Johns Manville. 2.3 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1. Thickness: 90 mils nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: White 2.4 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDER A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass- fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Basis of Design: Firestone Building Products: ISO 95+ GL. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray- applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Prime WALKWAYS A. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.10 AGGREGATE BALLAST A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast that will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following type and size: 1. Aggregate Type: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone. 2. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 3, ranging in size from 1 to 2 inches. 2.11 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Felt Sheet: Install in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Bond vapor retarder to substrate as follows: 1. Apply adhesive at rate recommended by felt sheet manufacturer. Seal laps with adhesive. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adheremembrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters. F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. 3.7 LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Loosely lay membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Comply with System requirements in SPRI RP-4 for design and performance conditions indicated . C. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. D. Accurately align membrane roofing, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations. G. Leave seams uncovered until inspected by membrane roofing system manufacturer. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. J. Where required or recommended by manufacturer, install protection mat over membrane roofing, overlapping a minimum of 6 inches. Install an additional protection mat layer at projections, pipes, vents, and drains, overlapping a minimum of 12 inches. K. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over membrane roofing at the rate required by membrane roofing system manufacturer, but not less than required for compliance with SPRI RP-4, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO system. Lay ballast as membrane roofing is installed, leaving membrane roofing ballasted at the end of the workday 3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. 1. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Owner, Contractor or Construction Manager, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, roofing system manufacturer’s representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. 2. Notify Architect and Owner no less than 72 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. 4. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Provide written notice of acceptance of the final installation from the roofing system manufacturer. 3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07531 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Boulder, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-1 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO SECTION 07570 - TRAFFIC-BEARING MEMBRANES (DECK COATING) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Conditions of Contract for Construction and General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to Work in this Section. 1.2 Work Included A. Work of this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and super- vision to install a deck coating system, including surface preparation and crack and joint detailing. B. Provide and install traffic-bearing membrane system as specified herein and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements to all supported concrete slab floor surfaces in the parking garage. Extend membrane system 4” up all vertical surfaces directly adjacent to the floor areas receiving membrane, including walls, beams, pipes, conduit, ducts, etc. C. Provide all detailing, including routing and sealing as necessary, at cracks and joints in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Detail coats over cracks, construction joints, cove joints, etc. are to be incidental to deck coating cost. 2. Cove sealants and construction joint sealants in areas receiving membrane are to be included in price for traffic bearing membrane. D. Deck coating Installer shall be specifically responsible for providing all preparation Work and joint sealants specified in Section 07920, Joint Sealants. 1.3 Related Work A. Following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittals Section 01300 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 3. Concrete Sealers Section 07180 4. Joint Sealants Section 07920 5. Pavement Markings (Garage) Section 09920 1.4 Quality Control A. General 1. Deck coating Installer shall be approved by deck coating Manufacturer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-2 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 2. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in application of one of the approved deck coating systems and have experience with five projects in size of 50,000 SF or greater. 3. Installer and Manufacturer shall review slope of slabs and condition of surfaces prior to bidding. 4. Manufacturer shall make available a qualified Manufacturer's Representative to assist the Installer and Engineer as specified herein. Representative shall be experienced in placement of deck coating systems. As a minimum, Representative shall be on site to review following procedures: a. Surface preparation and deck coating installation in trial area. b. Installation of deck coating from primer to top coat for first level or first phase. 5. A preconstruction/preapplication meeting shall be held to discuss detailing, surface preparation, application techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. Foreman and lead laborer for Installer will be required to attend meeting along with Contractor, Manufacturer’s Representative and Engineer. B. Trial Area Requirements 1. Prepare a 300 SF trial area incorporating all required preparation. Engineer, Manufacturer's Representative and Installer shall be in agreement that surface preparation in trial area is satisfactory before preparation is continued. 2. Install traffic bearing membrane in 300 SF trial area to review method of application. At same time as trial area, a test sample shall be provided on a 4' x 4' plywood sheet, which will be used to compare deck coating finish in other areas. Engineer, Manufacturer's Representative, and Installer shall be in agreement that installation in trial area is satisfactory before further installation of deck coating. 3. For recoat applications, Manufacturer and Installer, in presence of Engineer, shall perform adhesive pull-off strength testing on existing system and the completed system in the trial area in accordance with ASTM D 4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. Three tests are to be completed on existing system and completed system. C. Testing Requirements 1. Installer shall check deck coating wet film thickness and record test results by taking five wet film readings within a 1 SF area. Wet film thickness testing shall be completed a minimum of once per every 5,000 SF of deck coating placed or per individual section placed per day. Average film thickness shall be at or above wet film thickness equivalent of specified dry film thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Representative shall perform dry film thickness tests and record test results for base coat and total system. For each 25,000 SF area, three readings shall be taken in a single 100 SF area. Average dry film thickness shall be at or above Manufacturer's calculated average dry film thickness for total system based on specified dry film thickness plus aggregate. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-3 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3. Manufacturer and Installer in presence of Engineer shall perform adhesive pull-off strength testing on base membrane and completed system in accordance with ASTM D 4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. Testing is to be performed every 50,000 SF. For each 50,000 SF area, three tests shall be taken in a single 100 SF area. This testing can be performed in conjunction with dry film thickness testing. All test results shall be greater than 100 psi. 4. If thickness and pull-off strength testing do not meet above requirements, corrective action will be required and more frequent testing will be required on remainder of project as directed by Engineer. 5. Test damage is to be repaired by Installer per Manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Flood Test: Contractor shall arrange for and wet all slabs with water for purpose of detecting any defects in waterproofing which would result in leaks. Slab surfaces shall be wetted until water flows freely to drains. No finished spaces shall be insulated or ceiling installed until drainage test has been completed on the slab above and reviewed by Engineer for acceptance. 1. Potentially leaks are located by noting whether water from flood test is observed at underside of slabs or running down faces of walls. Leaking attributed to defective traffic bearing membrane shall be corrected by repairing waterproofing. 1.5 Submittals A. For record certification that the deck coating system is compatible with all of products in Divisions 3 and 7 to which it will come in contact. B. For review and approval a complete description of deck coating system proposed, including materials, surface preparation, and cure times, including repair materials for pitting, bug holes, popouts, and shallow scaling, and cure times and including aggregates. C. For review and approval Manufacturer's Spec Data Sheets of each product to be used. D. For record Material Safety Data Sheets of each product, solvent, or related chemicals to be used and certification that materials conform to local, state, and federal environmental and worker's safety laws and regulations. E. For review and approval standard color chart. F. For record ASTM C 957 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid- Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Integral Wearing Surface test results for thin deck coatings. G. For review and approval sample Warranty prior to application. H. For review and approval upon request qualifications of Manufacturer's Representative. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-4 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO I. For record results of slab moisture testing completed in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by Plastic Sheet Method. J. For record dry and wet film thickness test results and adhesive testing results. Include date, weather, and other pertinent information. K. For record Manufacturer's "Snow Removal Guideline" stating procedures Owner is to follow during snow removal from deck coated slabs. L. Three wet film thickness gauges. M. For review and approval proposed plan for grid layout to install each coat. Include quantities of materials, square footages, and yield calculations. N. For record upon request written certification that Installer is approved by Manufacturer. O. For record upon request qualification statement of Installer stating projects, size, location, owner and contact, engineer/architect and contact for projects that deck coating system has been applied. P. For record Manufacturer’s written approval of surface preparation. Q. For record Manufacturer’s written certification of trial area acceptance. R. For record Manufacturer’s certification of project review and that deck coating installation is in accordance with written recommendations. S. For record copies of purchase order and invoices indicating quantities and dates of material purchased. T. For record two copies of Applicator's Manual. U. For record written certification that recoat system is compatible with existing system. 1.6 Samples A. Submit for review and approval, 12 inch square samples of deck coating system representative of color, thickness, and surface texture. Samples may also be requested for chemical analysis. 1.7 Environmental Requirements A. Manufacturer and Installer are required to confirm that all deck coating materials used in accordance with this Section conform to local, state, and federal environmental and workers' safety laws and regulations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-5 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1. VOC content of materials shall not exceed limits per Environmental Protection Agency Natural Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings (40CFR59). B. Installer is solely responsible for fume control and shall take all necessary precautions against injury to personnel or adjacent building occupants during application. As a minimum, Installer shall take the following precautions: 1. Provide and maintain barricades. 2. Locate and protect building air intakes during application. 3. Follow all state, federal, and local safety regulations. 4. Follow all Manufacturer's safety requirements. 5. Dispose empty containers immediately and properly. 6. Use protective equipment. 7. Ensure Work area is well vented to outside. 1.8 Transportation and Handling A. Deliver all materials to site in original, unopened containers, bearing following information: 1. Name of product 2. Name of Manufacturer 3. Date of Manufacturer 4. Lot or batch number 5. UL Labels B. Store materials under cover, protected from weather, within Manufacturer's recommended temperatures ranges. C. Replace containers or materials showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to Owner. D. At no time shall weight of stored material placed on a slab area exceed 30 PSF or 2,000 lbs. over 20 square inches. 1.9 Warranty A. Provide to Owner a Warranty by Installer and Manufacturer that deck coating system will be free of defects, water penetration, and chemical damage related to system design, workmanship or material deficiency, consisting of, but not limited to: 1. Surface crazing of other weathering deficiency (including ultraviolet light exposure). 2. Abrasion or tear failure resulting from normal traffic use. 3. Tear failure resulting from new or existing cracks in substrate not exceeding 1/16 inch in width. 4. Debonding from substrate or delaminating between layers. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-6 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 5. Defective installation. 6. Debonding or damage of repair material used for filling in pitting, bug holes, popouts, and shallow scaling with concrete or deck coating material. B. Warranty shall be "Joint and Several" in which Installer and Manufacturer will jointly and severally warrant and provide at no charge to Owner materials and labor needed to properly repair or replace product and replace parking stripes within duration of Warranty. In event of either party's non-performance, full burden and responsibility for any Warranty repair shall fall upon remaining party. C. Vandalism, abrasive maintenance equipment, and construction traffic are not normal traffic use and are exempt from Warranty. D. Normal traffic is considered to include snow removal equipment with rubber tipped blades as described in National Parking Association publication, "Parking Garage Maintenance Manual". E. New concrete may experience shrinkage. Installer shall provide system suitable for such application. Warranty shall cover deck coating damage due to new concrete slab cracking not exceeding 1/16 inch. F. Recoat systems are applied over existing systems. Installer shall provide system suitable for such application. Warranty shall cover recoat system. 1.10 Warranty Duration A. Bid price shall include a five (5) year Warranty commencing with date of project acceptance in accordance General Conditions. B. Although completed areas of facility may be reopened to traffic and parking, commencement of Warranty period will not occur prior to acceptance of entire project. C. A single Warranty commencement date will apply to all waterproofing. D. Warranty shall include a transfer clause that allows Warranty to be transferred to a new Owner upon sale of property within Warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Deck Coating - General A. Deck coating system shall be a fluid applied, waterproof, traffic bearing elastomeric membrane capable of preventing penetration of concrete by water, gasoline, oils, greases, salts, deicer chemicals, battery acids and radiator coolants. B. Color of deck coating shall be gray with Owner selecting shade of gray from standard color chart submittal. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-7 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO C. Material to fill in pitting, bug holes, popouts, and shallow scaling shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Same Manufacturer's deck coating system shall be used throughout. E. Deck coating thicknesses specified herein are minimum dry film thicknesses and do not include the aggregate. Specified thicknesses may vary from Manufacturer’s literature. A coat may have to be installed in more than one layer to achieve minimum thickness or on ramps a slope grade version of deck coating material shall be used. Install each coat in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended yield for required thickness. F. Thinner or solvent shall not be added to deck coating materials. G. All deck coating exposed to sunlight, including areas at perimeter of structure on lower levels, shall utilize a UV stable topcoat. H. Top coat shall be seeded with aggregate and back rolled. 2.2 Deck Coating System (Solvent System) A. Provide a heavy duty deck coating system. B. Approved heavy duty solvent deck coating systems are: 1. Iso-Flex 750U-HL HVT, LymTal International, Inc., Orion, MI. Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils and top coat at 12 mils. 2. Auto-Gard Double Texture, Neogard Corporation, Dallas, TX. Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils, and top coat at 12 mils. 3. Sonoguard, BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN. Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils, and top coat at 12 mils. 4. CCW5123-HD, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Wylie, TX. Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils and top coat at 12 mils. 5. Sikalastic 710/715, Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ. Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils, top coat at 12 mils. 6. Vulkem 350NF/345/346, Tremco, Cleveland, OH. . Primer, base coat at 25 mils, grit coat at 25 mils, top coat at 12 mils. 2.3 Deck Coating Aggregate A. Approved aggregates for medium and heavy duty deck coating systems are: 1. #10 Granusil, Unimin, Ottawa, MN. 2. 16-30 Fracsand, Oglebay Norton Industrial Sands, Inc., Brady, TX. 3. T16/30, Badger Mining Corporation, Berlin, WI. 4. or Approved Equivalent. B. Approved aggregates for extra heavy duty deck coating systems are basalt aggregate (traprock) as follows: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-8 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 1. Emeri-crete, Portsmouth, NH. 2. Or Approved Equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General A. Inspect surfaces to receive Work and report immediately in writing to Engineer as required in General Conditions any deficiencies in surface which render it unsuitable for proper execution of this Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner in accordance with Engineer. B. Coordinate and verify that related Work meets following requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces are finished, cleaned and prepped, and have completed required curing period. 2. Previous surface treatments have been removed or are compatible with the systems to be installed. 3. Systems selected for use are compatible with each other. 4. All concrete repairs are completed. 5. Sealant installation may occur several months prior to deck coating. Installer to repair damaged or defective sealants prior to deck coating installation. 3.2 Preparation A. Remove all oil, grease spots, and contaminates in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Shotblast all concrete surfaces to receive deck coating. Shotblast equipment performance requirements are as follows: 1. Equipment shall be capable of traveling at a constant speed to provide uniform profile. Speed and size of equipment and size of steel shot shall be selected to provide desired preparation without causing unnecessary damage to concrete surface. 2. Equipment shall vacuum up, or otherwise retain all dirt, dust, and debris from blasting operation. 3. Areas inaccessible to shotblaster (i.e. vertical surfaces, against walls, columns, stairways, etc.) are to be abrasive blasted or abraded to same performance. 4. Shotblasted surface must be clean with a profile in which a minimum 1/16 inch of existing concrete surface is removed. Fine aggregates must be exposed; however, coarse aggregate must not be exposed. All laitance must be removed. Surface profile to match ICRI CSP5 in accordance with ICRI Guideline No. 03732, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-9 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 5. Remove debris immediately after surface preparation. Debris includes, but is not limited to, shot, aggregate and dust. Debris shall be placed in a covered dumpster or a covered area where it will not be rebroadcast by wind or weather. C. Metal surfaces that are to be deck coated shall be abrasive blasted to near white metal, SSPC SP10 in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Painting Manual. Rust inhibitive primer shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations within 8 hours of abrasive blasting. D. Rout and seal cracks greater than 15 mils in accordance with Section 07900, Joint Sealants or as required by the Manufacturer. Cracks, coves, terminations and all unusual situations shall be detailed per Manufacturer's recommendations. E. Installer shall be responsible for repair or replacement of all materials damaged by surface preparation operations. F. Surfaces shall be air blown with sufficient pressure to remove excess dirt, dust and debris, and to assure that concrete is clean prior to application of deck coating. G. After shotblasting and abrasive blasting and prior to first coat of deck coating, pitting, bug holes, popouts, and shallow scaling shall be prepared in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. As a minimum, a thin epoxy mortar shall be used to fill voids. 3.3 Installation/Application A. Do all Work in strict accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and specifications and as indicated herein. B. Do not apply deck coating materials until concrete has been air dried at temperatures at or above 40 degrees F. for at least 28 days after curing period specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, or as otherwise approved by Manufacturer. C. Concrete shall be dry prior to application of deck coating. Installer shall perform slab moisture testing in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. Testing must be performed in at least 1 location for every 10,000SF of coating. Use of heat lamps for performing tests may be required in areas not exposed to sunlight. D. Do not apply deck coating material until concrete and air temperature is at or above 40 degrees F. Provide appropriate enclosures and necessary heating for application. Air temperatures directly below and above the slab being coated must be maintained at a minimum of 45 degrees F up to 48 hours prior to coating and at 45 degrees F for a minimum of 72 hours after coating, or as required for full curing of material. Provide high/low thermometers within Work area. As a minimum, provide two thermometers directly below slab and two directly above slab being coated. E. All deck coating shall maintain straight edges at terminations. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-10 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO F. Surfaces to be deck coated shall be divided into areas in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommended yield for the specified thickness and for specific container size of material. Area is to be divided by keel marks, or another Engineer approved method. G. All sealants to be provided adequate cure time, minimum 8 hours, to be tack free prior to deck coating. All construction joints, control joints, joints at perimeter of patches, cold joints and cracks (sealed and unsealed) shall receive a detail coat, minimum of 4 inches wide. Detail coat shall be same thickness as base coat unless Manufacturer's requirements are more strict. Detail coat shall cure a minimum of 12 hours prior to base coating. H. Extend deck coating up vertical surfaces as indicated on Drawings. I. Incorporate aggregate until refusal. Aggregate until refusal will result in a surface that is tan in color. Additional aggregate may have to be added after first pass. Seed topcoat with aggregate and backroll. J. Complete all Work under this Section before painting line stripes. K. If larger containers than 10 gallon pails and/or pumps are used, following items shall be performed. 1. Submit three weeks before start of construction, plans and calculations indicating how system will be installed. 2. No containers larger than 55 gallon drums 3. All containers numbered consecutively with numbering unique to each container. 4. Maximum of one pump and two power rollers/sprayers. 5. Deck coating installed in one grid at a time. Quantity of material to determine one grid size shall be 27.5 gallons (1/2 maximum drum size). 6. Develop method of measuring material in container or drum as it is being used, as approved by Engineer. 7. If Work is phased and Manufacturer’s yield is not met in accordance with this specification, then the use of pumps will be immediately discontinued, and maximum application grid size will be readjusted to correspond to 10 gallon pails. 8. If after initial phase the Manufacturer’s yield is consistently and uniformly met, then one more pump and two more power rollers/sprayers may be used with Engineer's approval. Each pump shall have its own operator and be used for separate grids. 3.4 Damage and Repairs A. Any necessary repairs for deck coating resulting from dry film testing are to be repaired by Installer. B. Pinholing of deck coating will be cause for rejection. Installer shall repair and take necessary steps to prevent pinholing to occur at no additional expense to Owner. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, COLORADO DECEMBER 20, 2013 CONCRETE SEALERS 07570-11 © Carl Walker, Inc. Denver, CO 3.5 Cleanup A. Remove all excess primer, sealant, deck coating, and masking materials from structure. END OF SECTION 07570 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. b. Other fabrications indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section "Concrete Roof Tiles" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with concrete tile roofing. 3. Division 7 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 4. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal roof panels. 5. Division 7 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels. 6. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 7. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches . B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. C. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. D. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Fluoropolymer Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace coil- coated sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period (Fluoropolymer Finishes): 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat . 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric siliconepolymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with silicone sealant concealed within joints. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Soldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. G. Sealed Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches minimum beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches minimum beyond wall openings. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following manufactured roof specialties: 1. Roof edge drainage systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants. 5. Division 15 Plumbing sections for copper drainage leaders. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Manufacture and install manufactured roof specialties to resist thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide manufactured roof specialties that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof specialties that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs. field-assembled work. Include the following: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring manufactured roof specialties including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 2. Details for expansion and contraction. C. Fabrication Samples: For roof edge drainage systems made from 12-inch lengths of full- size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof specialties with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 5. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The designs for roof edge drainage system are based on products by the named manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either products by the named manufacturer or comparable products by one of the other manufacturers specified. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.2 EXPOSED METALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper. 1. Pre-Patinated Copper-Sheet Finish: Verdigris, pre-patinated according to ASTM B 882. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. E. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, lead-free solder. 2.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Andreas Renner KG or one of the following: 1. Berger Building Products, Inc. 2. Coppercraft. B. Gutters: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with mitered and welded or soldered corner units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front gutter rim. Furnish with flat-stock gutter straps and gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1. Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal: a. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.. 2. Gutter Style: Half round according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Gutter Accessories: Bronze wire ball downspout strainer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for manufactured roof specialties. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems. 1. Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks. D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. E. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. F. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties. G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except reduce pre- tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3.3 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install gutters and downspouts to produce a complete roof drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and solder to make watertight. Slope to drain leaders. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, hinged to swing open for cleaning gutters. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as manufactured roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace manufactured roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07710 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Roof hatches. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches. 2. Division 7 steep-slope roofing Sections for ridge vents. 3. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for preformed metal roofing. 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 METAL MATERIALS A. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2605. B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick. B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, siliconesealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.4 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Curbs Plus Inc. b. Pate Company (The). STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. Roof Products, Inc. d. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2. Load Requirements: Reference equipment schedules/ data sheets. 3. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.052 inch thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating . 4. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 6. Factory insulate curbs with 1-1/2-inch- thick, glass-fiber board insulation. 7. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to provide sufficient height for flashing and counterflashing. Coordinate requirements with roofing installer. 8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Curbs Plus Inc. b. Pate Company (The). c. Roof Products, Inc. d. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2. Load Requirements: Reference equipment schedules/ data sheets. 3. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.052 inch thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating . 4. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports. 5. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 6. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 7. Equipment support height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to provide sufficient height for flashing and counterflashing. Coordinate requirements with roofing installer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.6 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double- wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Bilco Company (The). b. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. c. Nystrom, Inc. d. O'Keeffe's Inc. 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 80-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 48 by 48 inches . 4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.079 inch thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating . 5. Insulation: Glass-fiber board. 6. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 7. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to provide sufficient height for flashing and counterflashing. Coordinate requirements with roofing installer. 8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 9. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. 10. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position. a. Test Loads: 1) Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 2) Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. b. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. c. Material and Finish: Steel tube, galvanized . d. Diameter: Pipe with 1-5/8-inch OD tube. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Roof Curb Installation: 1. Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level. F. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. G. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 2. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as recommended by manufacturer of roof accessories. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07720 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed SFRM. 2. Exposed SFRM. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving SFRM. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping systems. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material. B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. C. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view or the elements when the Work is completed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM. 2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the following: a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. 3. Treatment of SFRM after application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed SFRM. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements. 3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for SFRM during and after installation. 4. Review surface conditions and preparations. 5. Review field quality-control testing procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. 3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. 5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed. 6. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. 7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire- resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. 8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SFRM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6/HY or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carboline Company; Fireproofing Products Division. 2. Isolatek International Corp. B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch. b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness. c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft.. 3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM. 4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft.. 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less . b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 2.2 EXPOSED SFRM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z146 or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carboline Company; Fireproofing Products Division. 2. Isolatek International Corp. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows: 1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloride-free formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire- resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 39 lb/cu. ft.. 2. Bond Strength: 1000 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: 500 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. 4. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 5. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859. 7. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 8. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0. 9. For exterior applications of SFRM, provide formulation listed and labeled by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for surfaces exposed to exterior. 2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. B. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material. B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed. C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed. D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. C. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire- resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. C. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course. D. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. 3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article. B. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating. C. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated. B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup. C. Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish: 1. Skip-troweled finish with leveled surface, smoothed-out texture, and neat edges. D. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspection and prepare reports: 1. SFRM. B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. 1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire- resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. 5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. D. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. 3.7 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas. D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. END OF SECTION 07811 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07812 – DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Foil scrim- encapsulated ceramic- fiber- blanket fire-protection materials for use at fireplace flues and ducting and where indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of blanket fire protection based on comprehensive testing of current products. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of blanket fire protection compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of blanket fire protection and accessory from one manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide blanket fire protection complying with the following: 1. Fire-response tests are performed by UL or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. C. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies that include blanket fire protection are identical in materials and construction to those tested for surface-burning characteristics per ASTM E 84. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies are indicated by design designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing and inspecting agency. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of blanket fire protection with other construction specified in other Sections to comply with the following: 1. Avoid unnecessary exposure of blanket fire protection to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 2. Do not install blanket fire protection until ductwork and other construction behind fire- resistive materials have been completed, uninterrupted coverage of fire-resistive materials can be provided, and the need for subsequent cutting and patching of fire- resistive materials has been eliminated. 3. Expedite installation of blanket fire protection to minimize time structural members are exposed without fire- resistive materials. 4. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after blanket fire protection has been applied and inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Performance Requirements A. Two-hour rated fire resistive enclosure assembly, ASTM E119: Large Scale Wall Panel Test and Total Engulfment Test. 1. Zero inch clearance to combustible, maximum allowable surface temperature on unexposed side, 1978. B. Class I interior finish materials, ASTM E84. C. Through-penetration protection systems for air ducts, ASTM E814 and UL 1479. D. Non-Combustibility, ASTM E136. E. ISO-6944-1985, Fire Resistance Tests - Ventilation Ducts. 2.2 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION A. Manufacturer: 3M Fire Protection Products, Consumer & Safety Light Management Department. 1. Contact: 3M Center, PO Box 33225, Bldg. 223-2N-21, St. Paul, MN 55144-1000; Telephone: (800) 328-1687; Fax: (651) 733-8221; E-mail: firetech@mmm.com; Web site: www.3M.com/firestop. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Products/Systems: Fire protection materials, selected from the following according to required application: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A: a. Material: Patented inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim-reinforced foil. b. Type: Roll. c. Color: Aluminum. d. Combustibility (ASTM E136): Noncombustible. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 15A: a. Material: Patented inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim-reinforced foil. b. Type: Roll. c. Color: Aluminum. d. Weight: 1.38 psf (6.7 kg/m2). e. Thermal Conductivity (k-value) at 500 Degrees F (260 Degrees C) (ASTM C411, ASTM C518): 0.417 Btu/(ft2 × h × °F) (0.73 W/(m × K)). f. Combustibility (ASTM E136): Noncombustible. 3. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 20A: a. Material: Patented inorganic blanket encapsulated with a scrim-reinforced foil. b. Type: Roll. c. Color: Aluminum. d. Weight: 1.83 psf (8.9 kg/m2). e. Thermal Conductivity (k-value) at 500 Degrees F (260 Degrees C) (ASTM C411, ASTM C518): 0.417 Btu/(ft2 × h × °F) (0.73 W/(m × K)). f. Combustibility (ASTM E136): Noncombustible. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessory products and materials as follows: 1. Aluminum Foil Tape: a. Type and Size: Acceptable to wrap material manufacturer. 2. Filament Tape: a. Width: Minimum 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). 3. Banding Material and Banding Clips: a. Material: Carbon steel or stainless steel. b. Width: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). c. Thickness: Minimum 0.015 inch (0.38 mm). 4. Insulation Pins: a. Material: Copper-coated steel. b. Size: Minimum 12 gauge. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 5. Speed Clips: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Type and Size: Minimum 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) square or 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter round or equivalent sized insulated cup-head pins. 6. Access Door Hardware: a. Type: Threaded rods with 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wing nuts and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) washers. b. Material: Galvanized steel. c. Diameter: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). d. Length: 4 1/2 inches - 5 inches (114 - 127 mm). 7. Access Door Hardware: a. Type: Hollow tubing to fit threaded rods. b. Material: Steel. c. Length: 4 inches (102 mm). 8. Miscellaneous Anchorage Hardware: a. Type, Size and Material: Acceptable to fire protection manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which blanket fire protection is to perform. Do not proceed with installation of board fire protection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Install blanket fire protection to comply with requirements for thicknesses, number of courses (layers), construction of joints and corners, and anchorage methods applicable to fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. C. Install blanket fire protection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced standards. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to inspect installation of fire protection systems and to prepare test reports. 1. In the event work is found to be non-compliant, immediately remove non-compliant work. 2. Repair or replace work so as to bring it into compliance with the specified requirements. B. Inspection: Proceed with enclosing systems only after inspection by the independent testing agency and approval by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Identification: Identify fire protection systems with pressure sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl labels applied to both sides of the assembly, readily visible, depicting the following information: 1. The words: "Warning – Blanket Fire Protection System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management Of Any Damage." 2. Installing contractor’s name, address and phone number. 3. System designation of applicable testing and inspection agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. System manufacturer’s name. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off all excess fill materials adjacent to openings as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials recommended and approved by fire protection systems manufacturer and that do not damage materials in the openings in which they occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Coordinate installation of blanket fire protection with other construction to minimize cutting into, or removal of, installed fire-resistive materials. As other construction is successively completed, replace or repair blanket fire protection that has been cut away to facilitate this other construction. Maintain complete coverage of full thickness on members and substrates protected by blanket fire protection. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, manufacturer, and authorities having jurisdiction that ensures blanket fire protection is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07812 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 DUCT BLANKET FIRE PROTECTION 07812 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire- resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 2. Division 13 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations. 3. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 : 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through- penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project to a single qualified installer. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through- penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency, and building inspector if required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each required application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Nelson Firestop Products. 3. Specified Technologies Inc. 4. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories may include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self- adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-wall joints. 2. Head-of-wall joints. 3. Perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter edge of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Integrity Rating: Measure of system’s ability to withstand fire exposure without permitting passage of flame through openings or occurrence of flaming on any element of the unexposed surface of the fill material or floor or on the interior surface of the wall above the fill material. B. Insulation Rating: Measure of system’s resistance to both flame passage and heat transfer and requires maximum temperature rise on unexposed side of the fill material or on interior surface of the wall 1 inch above fill material not to exceed 325 degrees F above starting temperature. For system’s having a clearance distance of 6 inches or greater between wall and structural slab, average temperature rise shall not exceed 250 degrees F above starting temperature. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the respective ratings of construction that they join, indicated as determined by UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. 1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. Expansion and Contraction: Perimeter fire containment systems shall accommodate movement of the exterior wall due to thermal expansion and contraction and normally anticipated live load, wind, and seismic forces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Where inspection or examination of fire-resistive joint system installations is required by authorities having jurisdiction, do not cover up installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspections or examinations have been completed. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire-resistive joint systems indicated for each application in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide systems that have been tested and listed by UL or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.6 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. B. Designation System for Joints at the Intersection of Fire-Resistance-Rated Floor or Floor/Ceiling Assembly and an Exterior Curtain-Wall Assembly: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHDG. C. Reference Drawings and “Code Compliant Assemblies for Rated Construction” for specific Fire-Resistive Joint System designs. END OF SECTION 07842 STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance- rated construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for acoustical sealants for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 4. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. D. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Silicone Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Urethane Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS GENERAL A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 WEATHERPROOFING SILICONE SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES A. One-component, medium-modulus, neutral-cure, non-stain, non-bleed, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning 791, 795 or 756 Silicone Building Sealants. b. SilPruf NB SCS9000 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. B. One-component, low-modulus, neutral-cure, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant. b. SilPruf LM SCS2700 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. C. One-component, medium-modulus, high strength, neutral-cure, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant. 1. Acceptable Products: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Dow Corning 995 Silicone Structural Sealant. b. SilPruf SCS2000 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. D. One-component, neutral cure silicone sealant designed for Parking Structure joints. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning Parking Structure Sealant NS or SL or approved equal. 2. Application: Field applied as required. 3. Color: Concrete grey E. One-component, neutral cure silicone sealant designed to adhere to peel-n-stick weather barrier flashing. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning 758 Silicone Weather Barrier Sealant or approved equal. 2. Application: Field applied as required. 3. Color: not applicable F. Pre-cured Silicone Weatherstrip. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning 123 Silicone Seal. b. UltraSpan US1100 Pre-cured Silicone Weatherstrip as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. G. Pre-molded Silicone Weather Barrier Transitions to tie-in weather barrier substrates to adjacent curtain wall, storefront, window frames and other transition substrates. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning STS Silicone Seal. b. UltraSpan UST2200 Silicone Transition Strip as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO c. or approved equal. 2. Application: .Field or factory applied as required 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. H. One part, paintable acrylic polymer sealant. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Pecora AC-20+ Siliconized Acrylic Sealant. b. RCS20 Siliconized Acrylic Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field apply as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. 2.5 INTERIOR SEALANTS A. One part silicone rubber sealant that does not provide or maintain a nutrient surface for fungus. Ideal for high humidity environments. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Dow Corning 786 Silicone Sealant. b. Sanitary SCS1700 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. 2.6 STRUCTURAL GLAZING ADHESIVES/SEALANTS A. One-component, high-strength, neutral-cure, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant. Accelerated cure structural glazing adhesive/sealant. 1. Acceptable products: a. Dow Corning 995 Silicone Structural Sealant. b. UltraGlaze SSG4000AC (accelerated cure) Silicone Structural Glazing Adhesive/Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Color: Black. 2.7 GENERAL GLAZING SEALANTS A. One-component, neutral-cure, medium-modulus, fast cure, fast green strength, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant. 1. Acceptable Product: a. Dow Corning 1199 Silicone Sealant. b. SilGlaze II SCS2800 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, inc. c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. B. One part, neutral, ultra-fast cure silicone sealant. 1. Acceptable Product: a. SilGlaze II SCS2811-D1 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. b. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field or factory applied as required. 3. Color: Translucent (clear) 2.8 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. One part, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealants. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT 1. Acceptable Products: a. Sika Corporation: Sikaflex – 1a; b. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic NP1 c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field apply as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. B. One part, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealants. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T 1. Acceptable Products: STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO a. Sika Corporation: Sikaflex – 1CSL; b. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic SL1 c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field apply as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. C. Multi-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealants. ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T 1. Acceptable Products: a. Sika Corporation: Sikaflex – 2C; b. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic NP2 c. or approved equal. 2. Application: Field apply as required. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. 2.9 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANT A. Multi-Component, Self-leveling, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealants. ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and NT 1. Acceptable Products: a. W.R. Meadows: Deck-O-Seal 125 b. or approved equal. 2. Application: Sealing joint in swimming pools and fountains. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. B. Multi-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealants. ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T 1. Acceptable Products: a. W.R. Meadows: Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade b. or approved equal. 2. Application: Sealing joint in swimming pools and fountains. 3. Color: As selected to match adjacent materials. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 9 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2.10 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Basis of Design: As recommended by Acoustical Consultant. 2. Refer to Division 09 “Gypsum Board” for products. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: 1. Dow Corning 1200 OS, P5200, Primer C, Primer P. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. SS4179P, SS4044P, SS4004P (tinted) or SCP3195P primer(s) as recommended by manufacturer and required by application. B. Backer Rod for Weather Sealing Applications: 1. Material: Non-gassing polyethylene or flexible polyurethane foam rod. 2. Stucco and Porous Surface Applications: Non-gassing polyethylene, non-gassing polyolefin or flexible polyurethane foam rod. 3. Width: 25 to 50 percent greater than width of joint to extend continuous pressure against joint walls. 4. Material shall expand and contract with bead movement without pushing sealant out of joint during compression cycle. 5. Do not use solid rubber backup materials, unless tested for compatibility with sealants and approved by Architect. C. Backer Rod for Glazing Applications: 1. Material: Non-gassing polyethylene, Non-Gassing polyolefin or flexible polyurethane foam rod. 2. Porous Surface Applications: Non-gassing polyethylene, non-gassing polyolefin or flexible polyurethane foam rod. 3. Width: 25 to 50 perfect greater than width of joint to extend continuous pressure against joint walls. 4. Material shall expand and contract with bead movement without pushing sealant out of joint during compression cycle. 5. Do not use solid rubber backup materials, unless tested for compatibility with sealant and approved by Architect. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 10 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO D. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape, approved by manufacturer. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Wood. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 11 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 12 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. F. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 mm) inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 13 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint- sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 14 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Exterior: 1. Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. a. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable neutral-curing silicone sealant. 3. Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry/stone/porcelain tile. a. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral- and basic-curing silicone sealant. 4. Exterior vertical joints between other materials than those listed: a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant. 5. Exterior perimeter joints between various materials and frames of doors, windows, and louvers. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant. 6. Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant. 7. Exterior joints in vertical and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant. 8. Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of pavers. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 9. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. a. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. B. Interior: 1. Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. a. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant. 3. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. a. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant. STRATA VAIL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS VAIL, CO DECEMBER 20, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 15 ©OZ Architecture Denver, CO 4. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. a. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 5. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. a. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 6. Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. a. Joint Sealant: Acoustical sealant. END OF SECTION 07920